Ford - Aerostar - Owners Manual - 1985 - 1997

File:01cppia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:27:26 1995 [PI00400(ALL)06/95] 36 pica chart:0095000-B File:01cppia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:27:26 1995 *[PI00800(ALL)03/95] thirty-six pica chart:0040299-A File:01cppia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:27:26 1995 *[PI02300(ALL)05/95] Table of Contents Introductory Information ............................... 1 Safety Restraints ............................................ 11 Starting Your Aerostar ................................. 61 Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 73 Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 89 Steering Column Controls ........................ 109 Features .......................................................... 121 Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 149 Driving Your Aerostar ............................... 185 Roadside Emergencies ................................ 225 Customer Assistance ................................... 245 Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 252 Accessories .................................................... 257 Servicing Your Aerostar .............................. 265 Quick Index .................................................. 351 Index ............................................................... 359 Service Station Information ...................... 380 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 Introductory Information *[IN00300(ALL)04/95] *[IN00400(ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication to learning what you want, determination to develop the right concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard by which others are judged. *[IN00500(ALL)04/95] *[IN00600(ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles *[IN00700(ALL)04/95] ❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our *[IN00750(ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our *[IN00800(ALL)04/95] ❑ Employee involvement is our way of life. *[IN00900(ALL)04/95] ❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We ❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our products and services must be our number one priority. work must be done with you in mind, providing better products and services than our competition. success. We must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our products — in their safety and value — and in our services, our human relations, our competitiveness, and our profitability. We are a team. We must treat one another with trust and respect. must maintain mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our other business associates. 1 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 *[IN01000(ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct *[IN01010(ALL)08/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide *[IN01020(ALL)08/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This guide has information about the equipment and the options for your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options available to you. If you do not know which information applies to your vehicle, talk to your dealer. *[IN01030(ALL)08/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications or design without any notice and without incurring obligation. *[IN01040(ALL)07/95] *[IN01042(ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS *[IN01044(ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people. Please read all WARNINGS carefully. *[IN01046(ALL)05/95] RWARNING worldwide must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and commands respect for its integrity and for its positive contributions to society. NOTES give you additional information about the subject matter you are referencing. 2 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 *[IN01050(ALL)08/95] *[IN01060(ALL)08/95] Finding Information in This Guide *[IN01070(ALL)08/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page number following each item which indicates where detailed information can be found. *[IN01080(ALL)08/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think of other related words and look them up. We have designed the Index so that you can find information under a technical term. *[IN01090(ALL)08/95] *[IN01100(ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version % After you have read this guide once, you will probably return to it when you have a specific question or need additional information. To help you find specific information quickly, you can use the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or the Index. French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. % Your Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet *[IN02500(ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track of all services performed. *[IN02400(ALL)04/95] 3 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 % *[IN02600(ALL)01/95] *[IN02700(ALL)04/95] About the Warranties Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions Warranties. % Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and responsibilities. *[IN03250(ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page of this owner guide. *[IN04000(ALL)01/95] *[IN04100(ALL)01/94] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan *[IN04200(ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle. However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan. *[IN04250(ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the details. *[IN03100(ALL)03/95] % If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract provides service protection for a longer period of time than the basic warranty that comes with your vehicle. 4 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 % Special Notice [IN04775(ALL)03/91] NOTICE TO OWNERS OF E-4WD VEHICLES [IN04805(ALL)03/95] As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read the special driving instructions in the section Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD) in this book. *[IN04650(ALL)06/92] % Your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) *[IN05200(ALL)06/95] Your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the same as the warranty number that appears on your owner card. You should include this number any time you write to Ford Motor Company about your vehicle. *[IN05300(ALL)06/95] The Vehicle Identification Number is attached to your vehicle in the following places: *[IN05400(ALL)05/95] ❑ on the metal tag attached to the top of the *[IN05100(ALL)06/95] instrument panel on the driver’s side — you can see the tag by looking through the windshield from outside your vehicle. *[IN05450(ALL)10/89] one inch art:0010558-A Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number) 5 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 *[IN05500(ALL)06/95] % *[IN05515(ALL)05/95] ❑ on the Safety Compliance Certification Label — this label is attached to the left front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar. It is required by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and is made of special material. If someone tampers with it, it will be destroyed and/or a destruction pattern will appear. The label contains the name of the manufacturer, the month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the Vehicle Identification Number. The label also contains Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Ratings, wheel and tire data and information codes for additional vehicle data. For further information about the Safety Compliance Certification Label and the information contained on it, refer to the Index. % Federal Highway Administration Regulation *[IN05560(ALL)06/95] Regulations such as those issued by the Federal Highway Administration or issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and/or state and local laws and regulations may require additional equipment for the way you intend to use the vehicle. It is the responsibility of the registered owner to determine the applicability of such laws and regulations to your intended use for the vehicle, and to arrange for the installation of required equipment. Your Ford dealer has information about the availability of many items of equipment which may be ordered for your vehicle. *[IN05545(ALL)06/95] 6 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 % *[IN06000(ALL)01/95] *[IN06100(ALL)03/95] *[IN06300(ALL)01/95] % Breaking Your Vehicle In Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to how you drive your vehicle. ❑ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake linings, you should take these steps: *[IN06400(ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to stop. *[IN06500(ALL)01/95] *[IN06600(ALL)01/95] *[IN06700(ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance. *[IN06750(ALL)12/93] *[IN06800(ALL)01/95] % — Apply the brakes gradually. The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving. ❑ Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torque specifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation. Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Also retighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 km after any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. ❑ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special “break-in” oils. 7 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 % Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle *[IN06950(ALL)04/95] *[IN07300(ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle *[IN07400(ALL)06/95] *[IN07500(ALL)04/95] *[IN07600(ALL)04/95] DO NOT: *[IN07700(ALL)04/95] *[IN07800(ALL)07/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot *[IN06900(ALL)04/95] % Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with a mild detergent. ❑ Wash your vehicle with hot water ❑ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. *[IN07900(ALL)07/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical industrial fallout. *[IN07950(ALL)07/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. *[IN08100(ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the finish. 8 File:02cpina.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:33:02 1995 *[IN08200(ALL)04/95] *[IN08300(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts *[IN08400(ALL)04/95] *[IN08500(ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts *[IN08600(ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. % % *[IN08700(ALL)04/95] % Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents. Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause deterioration. 9 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 Safety Restraints % *[SR00501(ALL)04/95] *[SR00600(ALL)03/95] Important Safety Belt Information The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada the law requires their use. *[SR00700(ALL)01/95] *[SR00800(ALL)01/95] *[SR00900(ALL)01/95] *[SR01000(ALL)01/95] *[SR01100(ALL)01/95] *[SR01200(ALL)01/95] *[SR01700(ALL)07/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when: *[SR02100(ALL)07/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this chapter for special instructions about using safety belts for children. *[SR02200(ALL)05/95] % ❑ the seatback is upright ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched) ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest ❑ the knees are straight forward To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. RWARNING Make sure that you and your passengers wear safety belts. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 11 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR02501(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person or across more than one seating position. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. *[SR02550(ALL)08/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. *[SR02601(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Never drive or ride with a twisted or jammed safety belt. If you cannot untwist or unjam the safety belt, see the nearest qualified technician immediately. *[SR02700(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. *[SR02900(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the risk of the door coming open in a collision. 12 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 % Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts *[SR03200(ALL)06/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, thelap/shoulder belt locks and helps reduce your forward movement. *[SR03400(ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position that suits you best. *[SR03500(ALL)05/95] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. *[SR03000(ALL)05/95] *[SR03600(ALL)06/95] quarter page art:0010018-B Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt [SR03650(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety Belt Information at the beginning of this chapter. 13 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR03800(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095046-A Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts — front and rear outboard seating positions *[SR03900(ALL)07/95] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original position to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle. *[SR04000(ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passenger and Rear Outboard Seating Positions *[SR04210(ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front seat outboard passenger and rear outboard passengers. *[SR04220(ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways: *[SR04230(ALL)06/95] *[SR04240(ALL)05/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also be made to lock by pulling on the belt. 14 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR04250(ALL)08/95] *[SR04260(ALL)07/95] Automatic locking mode *[SR04270(ALL)07/95] *[SR04280(ALL)07/95] *[SR04300(ALL)07/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant. ❑ Child safety seat installation. % In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be automatically locked and will remain locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides the following: This mode must be used when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear outboard seats where dual locking retractors are provided. *[SR04310(ALL)07/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode, perform the following steps: *[SR04320(ALL)08/95] *[SR04330(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and, when allowed to retract, a clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). *[SR04340(ALL)08/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is allowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. *[SR04350(ALL)07/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will switch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats for Children in this chapter. 15 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR04375(ALL)08/95] All Two Passenger Bench or Bedseat *[SR04400(ALL)12/91] In addition to anchorages in the floor and roof structures, some rear safety belts have a detachable anchor mounted to the outboard side of the rear seats. This should remain attached, except when removing the rear seats. *[SR04500(ALL)11/93] The second row passenger side outboard seating position uses a hook above the sliding/cargo door to stow the shoulder safety belt when entering or exiting the vehicle or when it is not being used. *[SR04525(ALL)11/93] NOTE: When the belt is stowed using the hook, DO NOT use the hanging belt as an assist when entering the vehicle. 16 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR04550(ALL)08/95] three fourths page art:0020880-C Proper stowage of shoulder safety belt [SR04800(ALL)06/95] Disengaging rear seat safety belts for seat removal [SR04850(ALL)05/95] In order to remove the rear seat, the safety belt must be disengaged from the seat. To disengage the safety belt from the seat, insert a key or small screwdriver into the slot provided on the detachable anchor. Then lift upward. 17 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR05000(ALL)06/95] three fourths page art:0095047-A Disengaging safety belt for rear seat removal 18 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR05200(ALL)03/91] Whenever a rear seat has been removed, the tongue end of the detachable anchor must be correctly stowed. See the following illustration. [SR05300(ALL)03/93] three fourths page art:0020786-A Rear seat shoulder safety belt — stowage (with seat removed) 19 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR05600(ALL)06/95] RWARNING When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury. Refer to the warning label on the seat belt. *[SR05700(ALL)03/95] After installing the rear seat, make sure the safety belt is not twisted before you insert it into the detachable anchor. A twisted safety belt may cause the retractor to not work properly. Then insert the detachable anchor tongue into the detachable anchor until you hear a “snap” and feel the latch engage. % Adjustable Lap Belts Without Retractors [SR07000(ALL)06/95] On the center seat of the rear three-passenger seats you will find a lap-belt without a retractor. You must adjust the lap belt to fit snugly and as low as possible around your hips. Do not wear the lap belt around your waist. *[SR06800(ALL)05/95] *[SR07400(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0020638-C Fastening and unfastening occupant safety lap belts 20 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR07500(ALL)06/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert the tongue into the correct buckle on your seat until you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened. % If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and tip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongue over your lap until it reaches the buckle. *[SR07800(ALL)06/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of the webbing until the belt fits snugly. *[SR07700(ALL)06/95] [SR07900(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0000029-F Unfastening the lap belts for the center front and center rear seating positions — end release buckle shown (other buckle similar) *[SR08600(ALL)08/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the end of the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle. *[SR08800(ALL)07/95] RWARNING The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. 21 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR09600(ALL)07/95] *[SR09700(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly *[SR09750(ALL)08/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. *[SR09775(ALL)07/95] *[SR09795(ALL)07/95] Safety Belt Maintenance % % For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from your dealer. Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure that they work properly and are not damaged. *[SR09800(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. 22 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 % All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. *[SR09825(ALL)06/95] *[SR09850(ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts *[SR09805(ALL)07/95] % Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it. % How to Untwist or Unjam a Safety Belt Retractor *[SR09900(ALL)08/95] If you should jam the lap belt retractor by allowing the belt to retract when it is twisted, you can free the webbing with this procedure: *[SR09925(ALL)08/95] 1. Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten it on the retractor spool. *[SR09950(ALL)08/95] 2. Feed the belt back into the retractor until it is completely retracted. Repeat previous step if necessary. *[SR09975(ALL)08/95] 3. Pull the belt out of its holder as far as it will go and untwist the belt or remove the object that is jamming the belt. Let the belt retract. *[SR09985(ALL)08/95] 4. Then, pull the belt out and let it retract several times to make sure that the belt works properly. *[SR09875(ALL)08/95] 23 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR10000(ALL)08/95] For Twisted Rear Outboard Combination Lap and Shoulder Safety Belts — Detachable Anchor [SR10020(ALL)08/95] Disengage the detachable anchor tongue from the detachable anchor, remove the twist and re-install the detachable anchor tongue end into the detachable anchor until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. *[SR10040(ALL)08/95] Procedure to Correct a Twisted Safety Belt at the “D” Ring (if so equipped) Front and/or Rear Outboard Seating Positions *[SR10060(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The restraint system shown in the following figures may be different than the restraint system in your vehicle. However, use these figures and this procedure to correct a twisted safety belt at any outboard seating position that has a “D” ring. *[SR10080(ALL)08/95] half page art:0060598-C 24 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 1. Grasp the belt webbing at the “D” ring. See Figure 2. *[SR10140(ALL)05/95] 2. Rotate and fold the belt webbing over itself as required to remove the twist. *[SR10160(ALL)08/95] 3. Feed the folded portion of the belt through the “D” ring. *[SR10100(ALL)05/95] *[SR10120(ALL)08/95] half page art:0060599-D 25 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR10180(ALL)05/95] 4. When completed, the safety belt should look like Figure 3. *[SR10200(ALL)08/95] half page art:0060600-D % Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) *[SR10600(ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), provided in addition to the driver lap/shoulder belt, and is designed to supplement the protection provided to a properly belted driver in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to the lower body. *[SR10300(ALL)06/95] 26 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR10650(ALL)05/95] *[SR10700(ALL)06/95] % The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts RWARNING Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to be properly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. *[SR10750(ALL)05/95] RWARNING All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always wear their safety belts, even when an air bag Supplemental Restraint System is provided. *[SR10900(ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even with an air bag system. Use your safety belts to: *[SR11000(ALL)01/95] ❑ help keep you in the proper position (away *[SR11100(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or *[SR11200(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions *[SR11300(ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from your *[SR11400(ALL)01/95] *[SR11500(ALL)05/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated % from the air bag) when it inflates rear impact collisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate in such situations that are not severe enough to activate the supplemental air bag vehicle In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to help provide additional protection for you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are not seated in a normal riding position with your back against the seatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and could possibly hurt you as it inflates. 27 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR11600(ALL)08/95] RWARNING If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, an inflating air bag could cause serious injury. *[SR11640(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areas that may come in contact with a deploying air bag. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. *[SR11650(ALL)07/95] For further information about the proper mounting of equipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled Some Important Information About Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602. *[SR11660(ALL)08/95] For additional important safety information on the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the other sections of this chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sections entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children. % How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System Operates [SR11850(ALL)05/95] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of the driver air bag, impact sensor, a system diagnostic module, a readiness light and tone, and the electrical wiring which connects the components. *[SR11800(ALL)01/95] 28 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR12000(ALL)05/94] half page art:0020842-C The location of the air bag and warning label *[SR12010(ALL)07/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impact and activate the air bags if necessary. The air bag system is designed to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight) head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses the crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag. *[SR12020(ALL)07/95] When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflate rapidly, filling with non-toxic nitrogen gas in a fraction of a second. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate by releasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes. The whole process takes place in a matter of seconds. 29 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR12030(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. *[SR12040(ALL)06/95] half page art:0011063-A Inflated driver-side air bag *[SR12060(ALL)07/95] RWARNING If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. 30 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR12070(ALL)07/95] To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in a crash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module, which controls a readiness lamp and a warning tone. The diagnostic module monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system, the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air bag inflators. *[SR12200(ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrument cluster and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. When you turn the ignition key to the ON position, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the air bag system is not required. % *[SR12300(ALL)06/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: *[SR12310(ALL)06/95] *[SR12320(ALL)06/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, ❑ or it will not light immediately after ignition *[SR12330(ALL)06/95] ❑ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The *[SR12360(ALL)08/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bag Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly in the event of a collision. *[SR12600(ALL)07/95] RWARNING % is turned on, tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 31 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 % Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles *[SR12675(ALL)06/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by qualified personnel. *[SR14300(ALL)05/95] *[SR14400(ALL)02/95] Safety Restraints for Children *[SR12650(ALL)05/95] % In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle — this generally includes children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must put them in safety seats that are made specially for children. Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these children. Check your local and state laws for specific requirements. *[SR14500(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. *[SR14550(ALL)07/95] RWARNING To prevent the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. 32 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR14625(ALL)08/95] RWARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. [SR14630(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. [SR14635(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. *[SR14650(ALL)06/95] *[SR14700(ALL)08/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. *[SR15000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. 33 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR15025(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. *[SR15900(ALL)01/95] *[SR16000(ALL)05/95] Safety Seats for Children [SR16005(ALL)08/95] Most child safety seats can be used in this vehicle only in vehicle seating positions with lap/shoulder belts. Any booster-type seat that places the vehicle’s lap belt or shoulder belt around a shield above and ahead of the child’s hips should not be used in this vehicle. This type of safety seat could cause injury by tipping over the front edge of the vehicle seat during a collision. % Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when installing and using the safety seat. *[SR16010(ALL)08/95] RWARNING The following instructions MUST BE FOLLOWED to reduce risk of injury from a safety seat tipping too far forward in a severe crash. [SR16012(ALL)08/95] Install forward-facing child safety seats only in vehicle seating positions equipped with lap/shoulder belts. Forward-facing convertible safety seats can be used in the center of the three-passenger second row bench seat only if a top tether strap is used. Ford recommends placing forward-facing safety seats in the second row and using safety seats with top tether straps for added protection. [SR16015(ALL)08/95] For more information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps in this chapter. 34 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR16025(ALL)08/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap belt combination with a sliding tongue, make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. *[SR16090(ALL)07/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. *[SR16100(ALL)06/95] RWARNING If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure other passengers. *[SR16125(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 35 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR16150(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward and away from the child seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button as shown in the following illustration. [SR16280(ALL)05/95] half page art:0032369-A Safety belt buckle placement for child seats 36 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR25601(ALL)08/95] Installing Child Safety Seats in the Front Seat and Rear Outboard Seating Positions [SR25650(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the right front seat passenger and rear outboard passengers. [SR25701(ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat or infant carrier in these seating positions: [SR25750(ALL)08/95] 1. Position the child seat on the seat of the vehicle. In the front seat, adjust the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible. [SR25801(ALL)08/95] 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt, then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. See Figure 1. [SR25900(ALL)08/95] half page art:0095072-A 37 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR26000(ALL)08/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted, and insert the tongue into the buckle. See Figure 3. [SR26100(ALL)08/95] half page art:0095073-A Routing the lap/shoulder belt 38 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR26201(ALL)08/95] half page art:0011240-B Buckling the belt 39 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR26301(ALL)08/95] 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child seat restraint mode). See Figure 4. [SR26401(ALL)08/95] half page art:0011241-A Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode 40 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR26500(ALL)08/95] 5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Push down on the child seat while you pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt. See Figures 5 and 6. [SR26601(ALL)08/95] half page art:0011242-A 41 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR26700(ALL)08/95] half page art:0011243-A 42 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR26801(ALL)08/95] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat, forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that the seat is securely held in place. See Figure 7. [SR26900(ALL)08/95] half page art:0011244-A Checking that the seat is secure [SR27000(ALL)08/95] 7. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. See Figure 8. 43 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR27100(ALL)08/95] half page art:0011245-B Checking the retractor *[SR27201(ALL)05/95] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat is properly secured prior to each use. If the retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 7. *[SR27205(ALL)05/95] NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic lock mode, allow seat belt to retract fully to its stowed position and the retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage. *[SR27210(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. 44 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR27300(ALL)05/95] Installing Child Safety Seats at the Rear Center Seating Position with Locking Adjustable Lap Belt [SR27350(ALL)08/95] DO NOT install a forward-facing child safety seat in the third row center seating position. Forward-facing seats must be installed with a lap/shoulder belt, or a lap belt and top tether strap. [SR27400(ALL)06/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue toward the loose end of webbing. *[SR27450(ALL)01/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. *[SR27500(ALL)01/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. *[SR27550(ALL)03/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. *[SR27600(ALL)01/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt. *[SR27650(ALL)04/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-side and in forward directions to ensure that the seat is held securely in place. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat steps 5 through 6, or properly install the child seat in a different seating position. 45 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR27700(ALL)06/95] *[SR27750(ALL)06/95] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps *[SR27760(ALL)06/95] You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket to the rear floor by using a tether anchor kit (613D74), available at no charge from any Ford dealership. *[SR27770(ALL)08/95] Read and carefully follow the instructions provided with the kit for installation of the child tether strap anchor. [SR27790(ALL)08/95] Ford recommends placement of tethered safety seats in a second row seating position with the tether strap installed to the tether anchoring point as shown in the instructions provided with the child tether strap anchor kit. % Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. *[SR27800(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Only use the tether attachment hole locations shown in the illustrations. The tether anchor may not perform properly if the wrong mounting location is used. [SR27810(ALL)05/95] Four (4) tether strap anchor locations have been provided in your vehicle. If you want your child’s safety seat located in the front, right hand passenger seat, you must use the tether strap anchor attachment location under the second row bench seat or right hand bucket seat. For second row seating positions, you must use one of the three (3) tether strap anchor locations under the third row bench seat. 46 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR27812(ALL)08/95] Until a floor anchor is installed, follow these steps to install a tethered child safety seat in the front seat: [SR27814(ALL)08/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt in the seat directly behind the front passenger seat. [SR27816(ALL)08/95] 2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seat belt retractor to switch the retractor to automatic locking mode. *[SR27818(ALL)07/95] 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from the lap/shoulder belt. [SR27820(ALL)08/95] 4. Install the child safety seat in the right front seat. Refer to the previous section on Installing Child Safety Seats. Hook the tether strap around the webbing near the center of the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt. *[SR27822(ALL)07/95] 5. Tighten the tether strap. [SR27824(ALL)08/95] Until floor-mounted tether anchors are installed, tether straps of child safety seats in the second row may be anchored to lap/shoulder belts for the third row, following the five steps above, or to the tongue of the third row lap belt. *[SR27830(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these precautions could increase the chance of injury in an accident. *[SR27840(ALL)05/95] RWARNING If the anchor bolt(s) is ever removed, the hole(s) in the floor must be sealed to prevent the possibility of exhaust fumes entering the passenger compartment. 47 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 % Built-In Child Seat (If equipped) [SR30010(ALL)05/95] The second row bench seat may include an optional built-in child safety seat. This child restraint is to be used only by children who are at least one year old, weigh between 20 and 60 pounds (9 and 27 kilograms) and whose shoulders (top) are below the shoulder harness slots in the seatbacks with the headrest in the full up position. *[SR30020(ALL)05/95] If your child is less than one year old or weighs less than 9 kilograms (20 pounds), always use a rear facing infant or convertible seat because a child of that size is not sufficiently developed to withstand crash forces in a front facing position. Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructions for weight and height restrictions. *[SR30030(ALL)05/95] Children must be properly buckled before riding in the vehicle. It is the law in every state and province. This child seat conforms to all Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safety standards. *[SR30070(ALL)05/95] Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided with this child seat snugly around your child. *[SR30000(ALL)05/95] 48 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR30080(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. *[SR30090(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. *[SR30100(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of this child restraint system can result in your child striking the vehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash. *[SR30110(ALL)05/95] *[SR30120(ALL)05/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat Read the following procedures and all of the labels on the Built-In Child Seat before using the seat. *[SR30130(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a booster cushion with the adult safety belts. A child using the adult belts could slide forward and out from under the safety belts. [SR30140(ALL)06/95] 1. Pull the headrest release strap and grasp the headrest as shown in Figure 1. Then release the strap and rotate the headrest fully until the latch “clicks” in the full up position. 49 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR30155(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0095048-A Figure 1 *[SR30160(ALL)05/95] 2. Continue to unfold the child seat until it rests on the seat as shown in Figure 2. [SR30170(ALL)06/95] half page art:0095049-A Figure 2 50 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR30190(ALL)05/95] 3. Read the information and warnings on the child seat. Check the child’s size, weight and age to be sure the child is not too small or too large for the child seat. Refer to Figure 3. [SR30195(ALL)06/95] two third page art:0095050-A Figure 3 [SR30200(ALL)06/95] 4. Pull up on the two black looped straps at the upper corners of the child seat to unsnap the cushion protector flap. [SR30210(ALL)05/95] 5. Lower the seat cushion. [SR30230(ALL)05/95] 6. Pull the lap and shoulder belts cinch release strap while pulling the shoulder belts fully out. Refer to Figures 4 and 5. 51 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR30240(ALL)05/95] half page art:0095051-A Figure 4 [SR30250(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0095052-A Figure 5 *[SR30260(ALL)05/95] 6. 52 If connected, squeeze the top and the bottom of the right half of the chest clip and pull to separate both halves. File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR30270(ALL)06/95] 7. Place the child on the child seat and position the shoulder belts over each shoulder. Refer to Figure 6. [SR30280(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095053-A Figure 6: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child [SR30300(ALL)08/95] *[SR30310(ALL)06/95] 8. Insert either the left or right safety belt tongue into the single opening of the crotch belt buckle as shown in Figure 7. (It does not matter which tongue is inserted first.) Then insert the other tongue. RWARNING If both tongues do not latch in the buckle, do not use the child seat. See your dealer for repairs. [SR30320(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095054-A Figure 7: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle 53 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR30330(ALL)08/95] 9. Fasten both halves of the chest clip below the child’s shoulders and adjust it to comfortably hold the shoulder belts in place on the child’s chest. The purpose of this clip is to position the shoulder belts correctly on the child’s shoulders. The clip can be easily pulled apart, and is designed to pull apart during a collision. The clip helps keep the shoulder belts on the shoulders of a sleeping or squirming child. Refer to Figure 8. [SR30340(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0095055-A Figure 8: Securing the chest clip 54 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 [SR30350(ALL)08/95] 10. Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that the crotch safety belt buckle is securely fastened. Adjust the lap and shoulder belts by pulling firmly on the adjustment belt. Refer to Figure 9. [SR30360(ALL)05/95] half page art:0095056-A Figure 9: Checking for securely latched buckle and locked retractor [SR30370(ALL)08/95] 11. If the shoulder belts are pulled too tight, pull on the lap and shoulder belts cinch release strap to loosen the shoulder belts on the child’s shoulders. Refer to Figure 4. Then retighten the lap and shoulder adjustment belt per Step 10 above. 55 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR30380(ALL)05/95] To remove the child from the built-in child seat: [SR30390(ALL)06/95] 1. Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom of the chest clip and pull the halves apart to open the chest clip. Refer to Figure 8. *[SR30400(ALL)06/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safety belt buckle. [SR30410(ALL)05/95] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’s shoulders and remove the child. Refer to Figure 6. *[SR30420(ALL)06/95] To stow the built-in child seat: [SR30430(ALL)05/95] 1. Return the child seat cushion to the upright position and lift the protector flap toward the headrest. [SR30440(ALL)05/95] 2. Fasten the snaps securely. [SR30450(ALL)05/95] 3. Pull on the headrest release strap and rotate the headrest downward until it latches against the child seat cushion. [SR30460(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always fasten the protector flap snaps when stowing your child seats to prevent the child seat cushion from rotating forward in a collision. [SR30470(ALL)05/95] The seat can now be used by an adult. 56 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR30480(ALL)05/95] *[SR30490(ALL)06/95] Inspection after a collision RWARNING All built-in child restraints, including seats, buckles, retractors, seat latches, interlocks, and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified dealer technician after any collision. *[SR30495(ALL)08/95] If the child seat was in use during a collision, Ford recommends replacing it. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the child restraints do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. If there is any bending of the vehicle seatback or seat structure, it should also be replaced. Built-in child seats not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. *[SR30500(ALL)05/95] *[SR30510(ALL)05/95] Built-in child seat maintenance *[SR30520(ALL)05/95] *[SR30530(ALL)08/95] Cleaning % Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder belts system of your child seat. See your Ford dealer if the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if the buckle and tongue are damaged and/or do not function properly. Your Built-In Child Seat may be cleaned with mild soap and water. Do not use household cleaners as they may weaken the webbing or damage the plastic parts. For your convenience, the liner can be removed, machine-washed, and air-dried. 57 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR30540(ALL)07/95] *[SR30550(ALL)07/95] % Safety Belts for Children Children who are too large for child safety seats should always wear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of child that will safely fit in the seat.) *[SR30560(ALL)07/95] RWARNING If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted as described, the risk of serious injury to the child in a collision will be much greater. *[SR30570(ALL)07/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. *[SR30580(ALL)07/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the specific needs of your child with your pediatrician. 58 File:03cpsra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:04 1995 *[SR30590(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not use a belt-positioning booster with a lap-only belt. *[SR30600(ALL)07/95] *[SR30610(ALL)08/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder belts should always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs. RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. 59 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 Starting Your Aerostar *[ST01700(ALL)03/95] % [ST01800(ALL)01/95] * *[ST02000(ALL)05/90] Ignition Understanding the Positions of the Ignition quarter page art:0020004-B The positions of the key in the ignition lock cylinder. % ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessories such as the radio and the windshield wipers to operate while the engine is not running. *[ST02500(ALL)08/95] LOCK locks the steering wheel and gearshift lever. *[ST02700(ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft. *[ST02800(ALL)05/95] If your key is stuck in the LOCK position and will not turn, move your steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely. *[ST02850(ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel or the automatic transmission gearshift lever. *[ST02100(ALL)07/95] 61 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST02900(ALL)05/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except the brake system warning light) to make sure they work before you start the engine. The key returns to the ON position once the engine is started and remains in this position while the engine runs. *[ST02950(ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts so that you do not damage the starter. The key should return to ON when you release it. The START position also allows you to test the brake warning light. *[ST03000(ALL)02/95] *[ST03400(ALL)06/95] *[ST03500(ALL)03/91] Removing the Key From the Ignition *[ST03600(ALL)03/95] *[ST03700(ALL)03/95] % 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park). 2. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot from the service brake. (This will avoid “binding” or “loading” the park gear if you park on a grade.) 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key. 62 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST04625(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[ST04750(ALL)01/93] RWARNING Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe and possibly fatal injuries to people as well as animals. *[ST04775(ALL)03/91] *[ST04780(ALL)03/91] Ignition Key Buzzer or Chime *[ST04800(ALL)03/95] *[ST04900(ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines % % The buzzer or chime will sound if you open the driver’s door while the key is in the ignition. Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key in the ignition. When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thing to remember is to avoid pressing down on the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for details about when to use the accelerator while you start your vehicle. 63 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST05150(ALL)03/95] % [ST05200(ALL)05/94] * *[ST05300(ALL)07/95] Starting Your Vehicle Preparing to Start Your Vehicle RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST05400(ALL)01/95] *[ST05500(ALL)08/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle buckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details. *[ST05600(ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turned off when starting. *[ST05750(ALL)03/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set before you turn the key. *[ST06015(ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lights on the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. *[ST06200(ALL)02/95] *[ST06300(ALL)06/95] *[ST06400(ALL)05/95] Starting Your Engine 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section. *[ST06425(ALL)03/95] *[ST06451(ALL)06/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is parked. % To start your engine: 64 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST06475(ALL)02/95] *[ST06501(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position after the engine has started. If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel slightly because it may be binding. *[ST06505(ALL)04/95] *[ST06510(ALL)06/95] For a cold engine: *[ST06515(ALL)04/95] ❑ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the *[ST06530(ALL)05/95] *[ST06551(ALL)04/95] For a warm engine: *[ST06575(ALL)08/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. *[ST06601(ALL)08/95] After you start the engine let it idle for a few seconds before driving away. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal and drive away in the normal manner. % % ❑ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine does not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. engine does not start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. ❑ Do not hold the key in the START position for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try again. 65 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 % NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature. This feature prevents you from shifting from P (Park) unless you have the brake pedal depressed. (The ignition must be in the ON position.) If you cannot shift from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: *[ST06627(ALL)01/95] *[ST06629(ALL)01/95] *[ST06631(ALL)08/95] 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Remove the key. 3. Insert the key and rotate it one position clockwise (ignition in the OFF position). *[ST06633(ALL)08/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted back to P [Park], you must repeat the previous steps.) *[ST06635(ALL)01/95] *[ST06637(ALL)07/95] 5. Start the vehicle. *[ST06625(ALL)01/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Aerostar in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. *[ST06640(ALL)05/95] RWARNING DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. 66 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST06800(ALL)06/95] If the engine still does not start after two attempts: *[ST06825(ALL)04/95] *[ST06851(ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it. *[ST06876(ALL)04/95] *[ST06900(ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position. 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts. *[ST06925(ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up. Then drive away in the normal manner. *[ST06951(ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. For directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter. % A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high. These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked. *[ST07390(ALL)07/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle checked. *[ST07300(ALL)05/95] *[ST07400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. 67 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST07450(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. *[ST07500(ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures, use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option). *[ST07600(ALL)06/95] *[ST07700(ALL)03/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped) % Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system to respond quickly. *[ST08000(ALL)05/95] RWARNING To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. *[ST08100(ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at night to start your vehicle the following morning. *[ST08150(ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block heater before driving your vehicle. 68 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 % If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision *[ST08170(ALL)08/95] *[ST08180(ALL)07/95] Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch *[ST08190(ALL)03/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switch by hand before you can start your vehicle. *[ST08160(ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. [ST08200(ALL)07/95] one third page art:0095071-A Fuel pump shut-off switch location *[ST08225(ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to start your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing service. 69 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST08250(ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision or substantial jolt: *[ST08275(ALL)04/95] *[ST08300(ALL)03/95] *[ST08325(ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel. 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset button down. If the button is already set, you may have a different mechanical problem. *[ST08350(ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF position. *[ST08375(ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do not see or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again. *[ST08400(ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving the vehicle. *[ST08425(ALL)03/95] quarter page art:0020107-A Reset button for fuel pump shut-off switch 70 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST09200(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST09300(ALL)05/95] *[ST09400(ALL)02/95] % *[ST09600(ALL)05/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. RWARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. *[ST09700(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has rear windows and doors that were installed as part of a van conversion, close them while it is running. This prevents exhaust fumes from being drawn into the passenger compartment. 71 File:04cpsta.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:35:31 1995 *[ST09900(ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: *[ST10000(ALL)02/95] *[ST10100(ALL)02/95] *[ST10200(ALL)01/95] *[ST10300(ALL)01/95] ❑ your vehicle is raised for service ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes ❑ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris. *[ST10400(ALL)08/95] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning system to bring in outside air. *[ST10600(ALL)03/91] ❑ HEATING — Set fan speed at MEDIUM or [ST10800(ALL)07/95] ❑ AIR CONDITIONING — Set the fan speed HIGH, the function selector knob on VENT, FLOOR, MIX, or the DEFROST symbol and the temperature control knob on any desired position. knob at MEDIUM or HIGH, the function selector knob on NORM A/C or MAX A/C and the temperature control knob on any desired position. 72 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 Warning Lights and Gauges % The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided into several different sections. The illustrations on the following pages show the major parts of the instrument panel that are described in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles. *[LG00525(ALL)12/91] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are grouped together on the instrument panel. We call this grouping a cluster. Your vehicle has a mechanical cluster. *[LG00400(ALL)01/95] 73 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 [LG01800(ALL)07/95] full page art:0095026-B Aerostar mechanical cluster 74 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 % *[LG03000(ALL)06/94] *[LG03100(ALL)06/93] The Mechanical Cluster The following warning lights and gauges are on the mechanical cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to possible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are optional. The following sections detail what each of these indicators means. *[LG03200(ALL)06/95] *[LG03300(ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light *[LG03400(ALL)05/94] This light comes on when you turn the ignition key to START to verify that the indicator bulb is working. If the light stays on or comes on after you have released the parking brake fully, have the hydraulic brake system serviced. *[LG03500(ALL)05/95] RWARNING % The warning light for the brakes can show two things — that the parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluid level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is low, the brake system should be checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician. The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately. [LG03600(ALL)07/95] one inch art:0095034-A Brake warning light symbol 75 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 [LG03700(ALL)07/95] Rear Anti-Lock (ABS) Brake Warning Light [LG03900(ALL)05/95] To check the rear ABS brake warning light turn the ignition key to the ON position. The rear ABS brake warning light should glow momentarily. *[LG03950(ALL)06/94] NOTE: If it does not glow momentarily, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked immediately. [LG03975(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If the rear ABS brake warning light begins to flash in a repeating flash sequence, check the rear anti-lock brake system continuous power fuse and brake lights for proper operation. [LG04000(ALL)05/95] one inch art:0095035-A Rear anti-lock warning light symbol *[LG04100(ALL)05/95] RWARNING If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or comes on while driving, have the braking system checked by a qualified service technician as soon as possible. *[LG04110(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled but normal brake function remains operational. 76 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 % Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime [LG04301(ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safety belt. One of the following will take place: *[LG04325(ALL)03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the key *[LG04351(ALL)02/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is *[LG04365(ALL)05/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before the *[LG04150(ALL)07/95] is turned to the ON position, the light comes on for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds. on and the chime is sounding, both the light and chime turn off. ignition is turned to the ON position, neither the light nor the chime will come on. *[LG04400(ALL)10/92] one inch art:0020046-B Safety belt warning light symbol % Door Ajar Light and Chime [LG04450(ALL)03/95] This light turns on along with an audible chime if one of the doors is not completely shut when you turn the ignition to the ON position. *[LG04425(ALL)03/95] [LG04475(ALL)05/95] one inch art:0020787-A Door ajar light 77 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG04500(ALL)03/95] *[LG04550(ALL)05/95] Check Engine Warning Light *[LG04575(ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefully installed. Do not install these devices by tapping into or running wires close to powertrain control system wires or components. [LG04600(ALL)07/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to the ON position, but it should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with one of the vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. [LG04650(ALL)08/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine is misfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. [LG04700(ALL)08/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you are driving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the condition corrected itself. % The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consists of the hardware and software necessary to monitor the operation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control system during normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, the Check Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on. 78 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 [LG04750(ALL)08/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when an engine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine Warning Light may turn on and will then set a Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. After refueling, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off after the vehicle has completed three consecutive warm up cycles without a mifire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambient temperature) and running until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. [LG04825(ALL)07/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to have the engine serviced. [LG04875(ALL)07/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the Check Engine Warning Light comes on and you suspect the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making sure it is properly seated. [LG04900(ALL)07/95] After completing three consecutive warm-up cycles and on the fourth engine start-up, the Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourth engine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician. 79 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG05300(ALL)05/95] one inch art:0020048-A Check engine warning light symbol [LG05525(ALL)03/94] Electronic 4-Wheel Drive Warning Light (If equipped) [LG05550(ALL)03/95] The Electronic 4-Wheel Drive Warning Light turns on when the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive system is not working properly. This light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to the ON position, but should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to the ON position, or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. [LG05560(ALL)03/94] The 4WD light will go off after a few seconds and stay off if all systems are operating correctly. If a problem is detected, the 4WD warning light will flash a certain number of times indicating the location of the problem. The flashing will continue until the problem is corrected. Each time the ignition key is turned on the controller will detect the problem and flash the signal. The 4WD system remains safe to operate and the vehicle should be returned for service. [LG05575(ALL)03/94] one inch art:0020529-B Electronic 4-wheel drive warning light 80 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG05900(ALL)01/95] *[LG06000(ALL)03/95] % Charging System Light This light indicates that your battery is not being charged and that you need to have the electrical system checked. [LG06050(ALL)05/95] one inch art:0095040-A Charging system light *[LG06100(ALL)07/95] This light comes on every time you turn the ignition to the ON or START position (engine off). The light should go off when the engine starts and the alternator begins to charge. *[LG06300(ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running, have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. % Supplemental Air Bag Readiness Light and Tone Generator *[LG06310(ALL)06/93] This light illuminates for six seconds when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light fails to illuminate, continues to flash, remains on, or if a series of five beeps is heard, have the system serviced as soon as possible. *[LG06305(ALL)06/93] *[LG06315(ALL)05/95] one inch art:0020778-B Supplemental air bag readiness light 81 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG06400(ALL)05/94] *[LG06601(ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (Voltmeter) *[LG06700(ALL)11/89] If you are running electrical accessories (when the engine is off, or idling at a low speed), the pointer may move toward the lower end of the normal band. If it stays outside the normal band area, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible. *[LG06701(ALL)05/95] If the battery is operating under cold weather conditions, the pointer may indicate in the upper range of the NORMAL band while the battery is charging. If you are running electrical accessories with the engine off or idling at a low speed, or the battery is not fully charged, the pointer may move toward the lower end of the NORMAL band. *[LG06750(ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible. % This gauge shows you the battery voltage when the ignition key is in the ON position. *[LG06900(ALL)03/93] quarter page art:0020052-D Battery voltage gauge 82 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG07500(ALL)05/94] *[LG07601(ALL)06/93] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge *[LG07701(ALL)03/95] *[LG07801(ALL)03/95] *[LG07901(ALL)04/95] If you lose engine oil pressure: % This gauge indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oil pressure. With the engine running, the pointer should move into the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below the NORMAL band while the engine is running, you have lost oil pressure and continued operation will cause severe engine damage. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe engine damage could result. *[LG08001(ALL)02/95] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions on checking and adding engine oil. Refer to Engine oil in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. To assure an accurate reading, your vehicle should be on level ground. *[LG08051(ALL)03/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary before you start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine if the pointer is below the NORMAL band, regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer for further service actions. *[LG08200(ALL)03/93] quarter page art:0020057-D Engine oil pressure gauge 83 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG08900(ALL)01/95] *[LG09001(ALL)03/95] % High Beam Light This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to high beam or when you flash the lights. *[LG09025(ALL)11/89] one inch art:0020537-B High beam indicator light % Chime for Headlamps On [LG09400(ALL)07/95] This chime sounds if the driver or passenger door is open when the parking lamps or headlamps are on. The chime sounds until you close the door, turn off the lamps or turn the ignition to the ON position. [LG09450(ALL)12/91] NOTE: The chime will not sound when the autolamp has activated the shutoff delay. *[LG09500(ALL)01/95] *[LG09700(ALL)06/93] Fuel Gauge *[LG09850(ALL)01/95] For a proper fuel gauge indication after adding fuel, the ignition switch should be in the OFF position while the vehicle is being refueled. *[LG09900(ALL)01/95] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly while the vehicle is in motion. This is the result of fuel movement within the tank. An accurate reading may be obtained with the vehicle on smooth, level ground. *[LG09300(ALL)05/95] % The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the ignition switch is ON. 84 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 [LG10000(ALL)05/91] one inch art:0020061-C Fuel gauge *[LG11100(ALL)01/95] *[LG11201(ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge *[LG11301(ALL)08/95] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the Normal band as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the Normal band under normal driving conditions. Under certain driving conditions, such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving up hills in hot weather, the pointer may move to the top of the Normal band. *[LG11401(ALL)05/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above the NORMAL band, the engine coolant is overheating and continued operation may cause engine damage. % This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate. 85 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG11501(ALL)01/95] *[LG11601(ALL)03/95] If your engine coolant overheats: 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible. *[LG11701(ALL)01/95] *[LG11801(ALL)05/95] 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL. *[LG11901(ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine. Refer to Engine coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. [LG12325(ALL)03/93] quarter page art:0020541-B Engine coolant temperature gauge 86 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG12601(ALL)01/95] *[LG12700(ALL)01/95] Speedometer *[LG12750(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle contains a speedometer which receives its input from the Anti-Lock brake sensor. The speedometer is also used to provide a speed signal for correct operation of the vehicle’s Powertrain Control Module (PCM), electronic transmission, and speed control (if so equipped). Because of this, it is very IMPORTANT to change the speedometer’s internal conversion constant if the size of the tires on the vehicle is changed. Changing the conversion constant to the proper value when the tires are changed will also ensure that the speedometer retains the original factory-set accuracy. [LG12752(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The conversion constant can only be changed six times once the vehicle leaves the factory. Your Ford dealership service personnel can change the conversion constant. *[LG12753(ALL)08/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a vehicle speed (mph/km/h) limiting device that is contained within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peak vehicle speed below a specified limit. (Vehicle speed limits may vary based on engine displacement.) % The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. 87 File:05cplga.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:36:50 1995 *[LG12756(ALL)05/95] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at high speeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is a normal condition and can be avoided by reducing vehicle/engine speed. [LG12760(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0095036-A Speedometer *[LG13130(ALL)10/92] *[LG13160(ALL)07/95] % Odometer/Trip Odometer The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) odometer is a combination trip odometer and total odometer. The total odometer is normally displayed. To see the trip odometer, press and release the SELECT button on the upper right side of the speedometer. To zero out the trip odometer, press and release the RESET button on the upper left side of the speedometer while the trip odometer is displayed. If the trip odometer is displayed, press and release the SELECT button to return the display to the total odometer value. 88 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 Steering Column Controls *[SC00400(ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed to give you easy access to the controls while you are driving. *[SC00500(ALL)01/95] *[SC00600(ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever % *[SC00700(ALL)03/95] *[SC00800(ALL)01/95] *[SC00900(ALL)05/95] *[SC01000(ALL)01/95] *[SC01100(ALL)01/95] % You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering column to: ❑ operate the turn signals and cornering lamps ❑ turn the high beams on/off ❑ flash the lamps ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off Turn Signals [SC01700(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0095013-A Turn signal operation 109 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC01800(ALL)11/89] *[SC03200(ALL)03/95] % If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does not illuminate or remains on (doesn’t flash) when you signal a turn, the turn signaling system is malfunctioning. Have this condition corrected as soon as possible, but make sure that you use the accepted hand signals in the meantime. High Beams and Flashing the Lamps [SC03800(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0095014-A Headlamp high beam and flash-to-pass operation % *[SC04400(ALL)03/95] *[SC04500(ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must be turned to the ON or ACC position. [SC04950(ALL)05/95] one third page art:0095015-A Interval wiper on turn signal lever — wiper and washer operation 110 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC05000(ALL)02/95] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at the end of the turn signal lever toward or away from the instrument panel to the interval operation you desire. *[SC05200(ALL)08/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of the wiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob pushed in. After you release the knob, the wipers operate for two to three cycles before turning off (if wipers were off) or returning to the selected setting. [SC05250(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The addition of shields to the front of the vehicle (e.g., bug shields) may adversely affect the windshield washer system from delivering fluid to the windshield. Devices such as bug shields are not recommended for your Ford vehicle. *[SC05300(ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid container is empty or activate the washers at any time for more than 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washer pump system. *[SC05400(ALL)01/93] RWARNING In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. Always warm up the windshield with the defroster before you use the washer fluid. If you cannot see through the windshield clearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in a collision. *[SC005450(ALL)07/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index. 111 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 % Gearshift Lever [SC05495(ALL)08/95] The gearshift lever on your Aerostar is mounted on the steering column. On the end of the gearshift lever is the OVERDRIVE OFF button. For additional information about the gearshift lever and the OVERDRIVE OFF button, see the Driving Your Aerostar chapter. *[SC05475(ALL)07/95] [SC05500(ALL)07/95] one third page art:0095028-A Overdrive off button [SC05504(ALL)07/95] OVERDRIVE OFF Light on Gearshift Lever [SC05508(ALL)07/95] This light indicates the operating range of the transmission. The word OFF illuminates on the lever when the OVERDRIVE OFF button is depressed. 112 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 % *[SC05510(ALL)03/95] *[SC05520(ALL)04/95] Hazard Flasher The hazard flasher is used to alert other drivers to hazardous situations. *[SC05525(ALL)10/92] The flashers will continue to flash with the brake pedal depressed. *[SC05530(ALL)08/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. The flashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fully charged and in good condition without draining the battery excessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or if the battery is not fully charged, the battery power can be drained. *[SC05540(ALL)09/93] *[SC05550(ALL)10/92] To use the hazard flasher: 1. Push in the flasher button; it will pop out and the lamps will begin to flash. *[SC05560(ALL)10/92] 2. To stop the flashers, push in the flasher button again. *[SC05562(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The flasher button will be sticking up slightly higher when on than when off. [SC05575(ALL)08/95] one quarter page art:0095077-A Hazard flasher 113 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 % *[SC05600(ALL)01/95] *[SC05800(ALL)05/95] *[SC06150(ALL)06/93] Horn To sound the horn, press either horn pad. one third page art:0020086-B Horn location (with speed control option) % *[SC06200(ALL)05/95] *[SC06350(ALL)02/95] Tilt Steering (If equipped) RWARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. You could lose control of the vehicle and injure someone. [SC06500(ALL)07/95] one third page art:0020089-C Turn signal and tilt steering release lever 114 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC06750(ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering wheel, pull the release lever on the column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. *[SC07250(ALL)12/89] Be sure the steering wheel locks in a notch. It is not infinitely adjustable. Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. *[SC07300(ALL)03/91] % Speed Control (If equipped) [SC07700(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095006-A Speed control switches on the steering wheel 115 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC07800(ALL)03/95] To set the speed control: [SC07900(ALL)06/95] half page art:0095007-A [SC08630(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your set speed while driving in j (Overdrive) on a downhill grade, you may want to select Drive (by cancelling Overdrive) to reduce vehicle speed. This can be accomplished by pushing in the transmission control switch located on the end of the gearshift lever. The speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goes above your set speed on a downhill grade. For the best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, leave the transmission in j (Overdrive), or return to Overdrive as soon as practical. 116 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC08700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. *[SC08801(ALL)05/95] In mountainous areas, at higher elevations, or when pulling a trailer, the speed control may not be able to maintain the preset speed with the transmission in j (Overdrive). [SC08900(ALL)07/95] To maintain a preset speed with an automatic transmission under these conditions, select Drive by cancelling Overdrive. You can switch to Drive at any speed. For the best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, leave the transmission in j (Overdrive). *[SC09325(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not shift the transmission into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. *[SC09500(ALL)05/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set speed. 117 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 [SC09525(ALL)06/95] To turn off the speed control or to reset the speed: [SC09575(ALL)07/95] half page art:0095008-B *[SC10800(ALL)06/95] In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turn the vehicle off. 118 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC11100(ALL)11/89] *[SC11200(ALL)05/95] *[SC11400(ALL)06/95] [SC11425(ALL)06/95] Driving uphill or on a steep grade When the speed control is on, your vehicle may significantly drop speed when driving uphill, especially with a heavy load. If the speed drops more than 8 to 14 mph (15 - 25 km/h) the automatic speed control will, by design, be canceled. You may have to temporarily resume manual speed control while driving up a steep grade in order to maintain the speed you desire. If the speed control “dropped out” after your climb is completed, the speed of your vehicle can be reset with the SET ACCEL switch, or returned to the previous set speed with the RESUME switch, as long as you are driving over 30 mph (50 km/h). To cancel speed control and then resume a set speed: [SC11450(ALL)06/95] half page art:0095009-A 119 File:07cpsca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:38:34 1995 *[SC11850(ALL)03/95] RWARNING If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it on slippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicle and could injure someone. *[SC11950(ALL)06/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approved may cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use only properly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio transmitting equipment in your vehicle. 120 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 Features *[FV00501(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out about standard and optional features. *[FV00601(ALL)01/95] *[FV00701(ALL)06/95] Doors % Door Handles and Locks [FV01000(ALL)03/91] half page art:0020178-B Inside handles 121 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV01401(ALL)03/91] one third page art:0020834-A Outside handles and locks *[FV01801(ALL)03/95] *[FV01901(ALL)10/89] Anti-theft front door lock knobs *[FV03801(ALL)04/95] Sliding Door [FV03901(ALL)08/95] With the door unlocked, unlatch the sliding door by pulling the inside handle to the rear, or by pulling the outside handle out and rearward. To close, push the inside handle forward or pull the outside handle forward. % Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to preclude unlocking the door by pulling up on the bullet type lock knob. To unlock and open the front door from the inside of the vehicle, pull on the inside door handle. [FV04101(ALL)11/89] quarter page art:0020188-B Sliding door handles 122 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV04301(ALL)01/89] Liftgate opening procedure [FV04401(ALL)07/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise. You can also unlock the latch (but not release it) with the power door lock system (if equipped). *[FV04500(ALL)01/89] 2. Reach under the license plate light shield and release the liftgate latch by squeezing the paddle handle rearward. [FV04600(ALL)03/94] 3. To make the gate swing up to the fully opened position, pull back and upward on the latch paddle handle. [FV04800(ALL)10/90] one third page art:0020190-B Opening the liftgate *[FV05300(ALL)10/89] Make certain that you close the liftgate door and window before driving your vehicle. If you do not, possible damage may occur to the liftgate door lift cylinders and attaching hardware. *[FV05400(ALL)08/95] RWARNING When driving your vehicle make sure that the liftgate door and window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent cargo from falling out. 123 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV05500(ALL)01/89] *[FV05600(ALL)01/89] Liftgate closing procedure 1. To make the liftgate swing downward, reach up and pull the lower edge of the liftgate (or the loop handle on the inner trim panel of vehicles with this option) and pull downward. *[FV05700(ALL)01/89] 2. When you have pulled down the liftgate enough so that you can reach the license plate light shield, push the shield down and forward to close the latch and liftgate. At this point, the latch is not locked. [FV05800(ALL)07/95] 3. You can lock the liftgate latch by pushing down the lock button before you pull down and close the liftgate. You can also lock the liftgate latch by inserting your vehicle’s door key and turning it clockwise after you have closed the liftgate, or by using the power door locks (if equipped). *[FV05900(ALL)12/93] The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. You can open and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It cannot be opened from inside the cargo area. 124 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV08800(ALL)02/91] Dual Rear Cargo Door (If equipped) [FV09300(ALL)05/90] quarter page art:0020200-A Opening the right rear door [FV09400(ALL)06/95] To open the left rear door, open the right rear door and then pull up on the tee-shaped handle located on the inside of the left rear door. [FV09500(ALL)05/90] To open the right side cargo door from the inside of your vehicle, find the slot on the door and pull the door handle inward. [FV09600(ALL)05/90] one third page art:0020249-A Opening the right side cargo door from the inside [FV09700(ALL)03/95] *[FV09801(ALL)05/95] When closing the dual rear cargo doors, remember to close the left rear door first. RWARNING Do not operate your vehicle with the rear double doors open. 125 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 % Power Door Locks (If equipped) [FV14200(ALL)03/91] The power door lock switches are located in the front doors. To lock all doors push the switch marked LOCK. To unlock all doors push the switch marked UNLOCK. *[FV14300(ALL)03/94] Memory lock (sliding door) [FV14401(ALL)08/95] Your vehicle has a sliding door memory lock feature that does not require the sliding door to be closed before using the power locks. The locking function will activate after the door is closed. *[FV14701(ALL)03/91] The manual door locks will override the power door lock controls. *[FV14100(ALL)04/95] [FV14801(ALL)05/91] quarter page art:0020201-C Power door lock controls 126 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 % Windows [FV20500(ALL)01/89] Sliding side windows *[FV19250(ALL)02/95] [FV20700(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0020207-B Opening the sliding side window % Using the Power Windows (If equipped) [FV23001(ALL)06/95] Each front door has a power control that opens and closes the window on that door. The driver’s door has a master control switch that operates both front door windows. You must place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position to use your power window controls. *[FV22901(ALL)03/91] *[FV23401(ALL)08/95] RWARNING When driving your vehicle make sure that the liftgate door and window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent cargo from falling out. *[FV23501(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not let children play with the power windows. They may seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants are clear of the window(s) before closing. 127 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV24001(ALL)08/95] quarter page art:0020201-C Power window controls — driver-side shown % *[FV24101(ALL)01/95] % [FV24801(ALL)05/90] * Seats Adjusting the Front Seat Manually [FV24825(ALL)06/95] You can move the driver seat forward or backward. If your vehicle is equipped with the optional reclining bucket seat, you can also tilt the seatback up to 30 degrees rearward. [FV25401(ALL)04/89] The front passenger seat cannot be adjusted. [FV25425(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095010-A Seat adjustment levers *[FV26001(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. 128 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV26100(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. *[FV26200(ALL)06/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. *[FV26300(ALL)08/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. *[FV26350(ALL)05/95] To move the seat forward or backward: [FV26450(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095011-A 129 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV26550(ALL)06/95] To recline the seatback: [FV26590(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095012-A [FV29801(ALL)09/89] E-Z Access Operation — Passenger Side Rear Captain’s Chair (Optional Quad Buckets) [FV29901(ALL)05/89] To provide easy access to the rear of the vehicle, the passenger side rear captain’s chair can be tilted forward. *[FV30001(ALL)11/93] *[FV30101(ALL)11/93] To tilt seat forward: 1. Put the seatback in the upright position. [FV30200(ALL)02/92] 2. Lift upward on the lower handle on the right (outboard) side of the seat. *[FV30300(ALL)11/93] *[FV30401(ALL)11/93] 3. The seat can now be tilted forward. To latch the seat in its normal position, push seatback rearward until it is latched in position. 130 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV31201(ALL)12/91] *[FV31400(ALL)12/91] Quick Release Rear Captain Chairs [FV31500(ALL)02/92] 1. % To remove: For left hand seats, lift and rotate the seat latch handle (located under the seat) rearward, causing the J hook to disengage from the front floor well retainer. Disengage the lap/shoulder safety belt from the seat by inserting a key or similar device into the slot in the detachable anchor and lifting upward. Stow the tongue end of the detachable anchor as shown. [FV31600(ALL)02/92] [FV31801(ALL)05/89] For right hand seats, lift and rotate the seat latch handle (located under the seat) rearward, causing the J hook to disengage from the front floor well retainer. 2. Push the seat assembly rearward to disengage the front and rear floor hooks and lift the seat assembly from the vehicle. 131 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV32200(ALL)12/91] To install the rear bucket seat: [FV32300(ALL)12/91] 1. Lift the seat assembly into the vehicle and drop the front and rear floor hooks into the floor wells at a point just behind the floor attachment pins. [FV32500(ALL)05/89] 2. Rotate the seat latch handle forward, causing the J hook to engage over the front of the foremost well retainer. [FV32801(ALL)02/92] 3. For right hand seats, continue rotating the seat latch handle until it comes to a complete stop on the top of the tube. This will cause the seat assembly to slide forward, engaging the front and rear floor hooks with the floor well retainers. For left hand seats, push the seat latch handle downward to a full stop. This locks the seat in position. Before you engage the safety belt, be sure it is not twisted. Remove any twist, then insert the tongue end of the detachable anchor into the detachable anchor until you hear a “snap” and feel the latch engage. [FV32901(ALL)02/92] *[FV33300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Check to see that the seat is latched securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat latch while the vehicle is in motion. 132 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV33601(ALL)05/89] Two and Three Passenger Bench Seats and Seat Bed Assemblies [FV33700(ALL)07/92] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Built-In Child Seat, make sure the child seat is properly stowed before operating the seat bed. *[FV33801(ALL)03/91] *[FV33901(ALL)06/92] To remove seat assembly: 1. Disengage the lap/shoulder safety belt from the seat by inserting a key or screwdriver into the slot in the detachable anchor and lifting upward. Stow the tongue end of the detachable anchor as shown in the illustration. 133 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV34001(ALL)08/95] three fourths page art:0095047-A Location of the detachable anchor warning label on safety belt 134 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV34101(ALL)03/93] three fourths page art:0020786-A Rear seat shoulder safety belt — stowage (with seat removed) 135 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV34201(ALL)08/95] three fourths page art:0095062-A Location of the stowage hook caution label on safety belt 136 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV34301(ALL)08/95] three fourths page art:0020880-C Proper stowage of shoulder safety belt 137 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV34401(ALL)06/95] RWARNING When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury. Refer to the warning label on the seat belt. [FV34501(ALL)08/95] 2. Fold the seatback forward and latch it in the down position (bench seat only). [FV34601(ALL)03/91] 3. Rotate the seat latch handles (located under the seat near the floor) upward, causing the latch hooks to disengage from the floor attachment. [FV34701(ALL)03/91] 4. Lift seat at rear and rotate about the forward attachment. When seat latches are clear of floor attachments, release the latch handles. [FV34801(ALL)03/91] 5. Pull the seat rearward to disengage it from the front floor pins. *[FV34901(ALL)05/89] Be careful that the latches are not damaged when the seats are stored. *[FV35001(ALL)05/89] *[FV35100(ALL)10/90] To install the seat assembly: 1. Clear the area of debris around the seat floor attachments. [FV35200(ALL)07/92] 2. With the seatback in a folded and latched position (bench seat only), place the seat assembly in your vehicle and engage the front seat hooks onto the forward attachment pin in the floor wells. *[FV35300(ALL)10/90] 3. Rotate the seat downward and engage the latch into the rear floor attachment. Lifting of the latch handles is not required for installation. 138 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 *[FV35400(ALL)10/90] 4. Ensure that the latch handles are fully seated in the down position. [FV35500(ALL)06/95] 5. Before you engage the safety belt, be sure it is not twisted. A twisted safety belt may cause the retractor to work improperly. Remove any twist, then insert the tongue end of the detachable anchor into the detachable anchor until you hear a “snap” and feel the latch engage. Refer to the previous illustration. [FV35600(ALL)12/91] The two passenger bench or bed seat must be installed in the first row behind the front seats on wagons with seven passenger seating. *[FV35701(ALL)01/92] To fold down the rear seatback: [FV35801(ALL)07/92] To lower the rear seatback down to its cargo or bed position, release the seatback latch by moving the release lever forward for the bench seat or upward for the seat bed. Then fold the seatback down. The latch will re-engage in the cargo position. [FV35901(ALL)08/95] To raise the seatback, release the seatback latch and rotate the seatback upwards until the latch re-engages. (A slight downward pressure on the bench seat seatback will reduce effort on the latch.) 139 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV36001(ALL)06/95] half page art:0095041-A Installation and removal of the second and third passenger bed and bench seat *[FV38301(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. *[FV38350(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. *[FV38401(ALL)05/93] RWARNING Before using the seat, make sure that the latch hooks are securely locked around the floor pins. 140 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 % Seat/bed conversion [FV42200(ALL)01/89] The seat/bed can be either a two passenger or three passenger seat. *[FV42301(ALL)05/89] To convert the seat/bed to a bed: [FV42401(ALL)07/92] 1. Pull up the release lever located on right hand side of the seat, and at the same time push the seatback rearward. [FV42601(ALL)08/95] 2. Push the top of the seatback down until it latches. [FV42701(ALL)05/91] The two passenger seat cushion will move forward when going from the seat to the bed position. *[FV42900(ALL)01/89] *[FV43000(ALL)07/92] To convert the bed to a seat: 1. While in front of the seat, pull the release lever up and at the same time pull the seatback up. Raise the seatback to the full upright and locked position. *[FV43100(ALL)02/95] 2. Make sure the safety belts are free and available for use. *[FV42101(ALL)12/89] *[FV43300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING The seat/bed should not be occupied while the vehicle is moving unless it is in the upright, fully-latched position. 141 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 % Using the Power Lumbar Support and Side Bolsters [FV47100(ALL)12/91] Inflating the Lumbar Support (If equipped) [FV47300(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle is equipped with this option, you can inflate a lumbar support pad in the seatback. To inflate the lumbar pad, push the INFLATE side of the rocker switch. To deflate, push the DEFLATE side of the switch. *[FV47000(ALL)03/94] [FV48100(ALL)02/92] quarter page art:0020244-B Power lumbar switch *[FV49000(ALL)04/95] *[FV49050(ALL)05/95] *[FV49100(ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Seats *[FV49150(ALL)04/95] *[FV49200(ALL)05/95] Fabric *[FV49250(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use it. % % Vinyl For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner or a mild soap. Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions that come with the cleaner. 142 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 % Underseat Stowage Drawer (If equipped) [FV49500(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the front passenger seat drawer, open it by moving the latch lever upward and pulling the drawer toward the front of the vehicle. To remove the drawer, pull past the stop tab on the back of the drawer. *[FV49400(ALL)03/91] [FV49800(ALL)05/91] half page art:0020694-A Underseat stowage drawer — RH front passenger seat only 143 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 % Mirrors [FV54100(ALL)08/95] For vehicles without rear door windows, the right-hand side mirror is a flat glass mirror. All other vehicles have convex right-hand side view mirrors. Convex mirrors have a curved surface and will show a wider view of the lane next to and behind your vehicle. *[FV50000(ALL)01/95] *[FV54400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING The side view mirror on the right makes objects appear smaller and farther away than they actually are. % Dual Electric Remote Control Mirrors (If equipped) *[FV54600(ALL)08/91] To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors: [FV54700(ALL)08/95] 1. Locate the switch in the driver’s door trim panel. [FV54900(ALL)08/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the center switch to the left-hand or right-hand position. The midway position moves neither the left-hand or right-hand mirror. [FV55100(ALL)06/94] 3. Press the appropriate side of the square marked by an arrow indicating the direction of adjustment. [FV55300(ALL)08/95] 4. Return the center switch to the middle position to keep the mirror in place. *[FV54500(ALL)08/91] 144 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV55800(ALL)12/91] quarter page art:0020258-B Power mirror control *[FV55900(ALL)12/91] Do not clean the plastic housing of any electric mirror with gasoline or other petroleum-based cleaning products. *[FV59400(ALL)01/95] *[FV59500(ALL)12/91] Console % Your vehicle may have a full console. The full console has the features shown in the illustration below. [FV59900(ALL)06/95] half page art:0095039-A The features on the console 145 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV65400(ALL)05/91] Garage Door Opener Storage [FV65500(ALL)05/91] At the center of the console, a compartment is provided for storage of a garage door opener transmitter. In its stored position, the transmitter can be activated by pressing on the compartment door. [FV65600(ALL)05/91] To install the transmitter: [FV65700(ALL)05/91] 1. Push down on latch. [FV65800(ALL)06/95] 2. Open door by moving hand towards front of vehicle while maintaining pressure on latch (Figure 1). 3. Remove the backing from the self-adhesive side of the VelcroTM (supplied with the console) and apply it to the back of your transmitter. [FV65900(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0020875-A [FV66000(ALL)06/95] 146 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV66100(ALL)03/95] 4. Install your transmitter into the compartment, making sure the actuator button of your transmitter is in line with one of the pegs on the door when the door is closed (Figure 2). 5. Once the transmitter is installed, the actuation peg on the door in line with your transmitter button may need to be adjusted for proper function. This can be done using the button height adjustment pegs (located on the compartment door). Add one peg at a time until pressing the door actuates the transmitter button (Figure 3). [FV66200(ALL)05/91] one third page art:0020876-A [FV66300(ALL)05/91] [FV66400(ALL)05/91] one third page art:0020877-A 147 File:08cpfva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:41:55 1995 [FV66500(ALL)05/91] 6. [FV66600(ALL)05/91] one third page art:0020878-A 148 By properly adjusting the actuation peg height, you will be able to actuate your garage door by pressing the door as shown (Figure 4). File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS00200(ALL)08/95] full page art:0060648-B 149 Electronic Sound Systems Compact Disc Radio File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 % *[AS00250(ALL)08/95] *[AS00300(ALL)08/95] Compact Disc Radio The Compact Disc Radio combines the Electronic Stereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player. *[AS00350(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CD Player *[AS00400(ALL)08/95] Most of the features of this unit work for both radio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobs and buttons control several different functions, so be sure to read all of the operating instructions carefully. *[AS00450(ALL)08/95] *[AS00500(ALL)08/95] How to turn the radio on and off *[AS00550(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume [AS00600(ALL)08/95] Press the (+/s) end of the “VOL” button to increase/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relative volume level. *[AS00650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power was switched off. *[AS00700(ALL)08/95] *[AS00750(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band. When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations. 150 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 % [AS00800(ALL)08/95] *[AS00850(ALL)08/95] * How to tune radio stations There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You can manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. These four methods are described below. *[AS00900(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manually [AS00950(ALL)08/95] *[AS01000(ALL)08/95] [AS01050(ALL)08/95] * [AS01075(ALL)08/95] tune You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time (FM changes in increments of 200kHz; AM changes in increments of 10kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — within approximately five seconds —pressing and releasing either the top (a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the top or bottom half of the “SEEK” button. While you are manually tuning, the display will show a blinking “M”. Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) ❑ Using the “SEEK” function This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the bottom (b) half of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By pressing and holding the button, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. 151 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS01100(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scan radio stations [AS01150(ALL)08/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scan mode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. Pushing the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down the frequency band, again stopping on each listenable station for approximately five seconds. *[AS01200(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. *[AS01250(ALL)08/95] % [AS01300(ALL)08/95] * ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons *[AS01350(ALL)08/95] *[AS01400(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. *[AS01450(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. *[AS01500(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the clock and station memory preset buttons (if programmed in auto mode) will need to be reset. Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies. 152 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS01550(ALL)08/95] *[AS01600(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the Automatic Memory Load feature You can activate the Auto Memory Load feature by pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET” button for approximately three seconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the first five strong stations for the respective band and storing them in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of strong stations from the FM band.) *[AS01650(ALL)08/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong stations into your memory buttons without losing your existing memory presets, which is especially handy while traveling. Your radio will automatically set your memory buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have to continually manually tune to existing stations. *[AS01700(ALL)08/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first five strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO”, then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily on the stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio is now in the “AUTO” mode and the display will show “AUTO” each time a preset is activated. *[AS01750(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in the frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will store the last strong station detected on the band. 153 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS01800(ALL)08/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin playing the station stored on memory button 1. *[AS01850(ALL)08/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to the manually-set memory button stations (or those stations set using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, the radio will store the next set of five strong stations. *[AS01900(ALL)08/95] Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust the tone balance and speaker output *[AS01950(ALL)08/95] *[AS02000(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response *[AS02025(ALL)08/95] *[AS02050(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response *[AS02100(ALL)08/95] *[AS02150(ALL)08/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker balance Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease bass (less “lows”). Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase treble (more “highs”), and push the “-” side to decrease treble (less “highs”). Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the left speakers. 154 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS02200(ALL)08/95] *[AS02250(ALL)08/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader *[AS02275(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble and positions of speaker balance and fader functions after adjustments are made, then revert to volume level set. Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. % Clock operation [AS02325(ALL)08/95] When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK” button to switch from radio frequency to clock. Only the clock numerals will be displayed in the clock mode — there is no AM/PM indication. When in the clock mode, the time will be displayed until the button is pushed again. However, if you retune the radio while it is in the clock mode, the new radio frequency will be displayed for approximately ten seconds and then change back to clock display. *[AS02350(ALL)08/95] When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK” button to change the display from elapsed time mode to track number mode to clock mode. If the CD track selection is changed when you are in the clock or elapsed time mode, the new track number will be displayed for approximately ten seconds and then revert back to the previous mode. *[AS02375(ALL)08/95] The clock can also be viewed with the ignition off. Push the “CLOCK” button and the time will be displayed momentarily. *[AS02300(ALL)08/95] 155 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS02400(ALL)08/95] To set the clock, simultaneously press the “CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes. % Using the Controls on Your New Compact Disc Player *[AS02450(ALL)08/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capable of playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without an adapter. The Player operates when the power is on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle the disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and follow all of the care and cleaning instructions under How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs.) *[AS02475(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc is ejected and “ERROR” begins scrolling in the display, remove the disc and reinsert it right side up (label side up). *[AS02500(ALL)08/95] The digital display on your CD player will either show the track (selection) number or the elapsed time. (The display mode can be selected by pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators for play (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”) are also in the display. (These features are described later.) *[AS02525(ALL)08/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD player will override that of the radio. [AS02550(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controls on the radio are also used with the CD player. Refer to earlier operating instructions about these controls. *[AS02425(ALL)08/95] 156 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS02575(ALL)08/95] *[AS02600(ALL)08/95] How to insert a disc and begin play *[AS02625(ALL)08/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automatically returns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing. *[AS02650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured to prevent the accidental insertion of a second disc. *[AS02675(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protection circuitry to protect the laser diode. If the temperature of the player reaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit will shut off the player and “TOO HOT” will scroll in the display for approximately five seconds (radio will resume playing). When the temperature returns to normal operating range, the CD player will again be operational. *[AS02700(ALL)08/95] How to stop and restart the CD player [AS02725(ALL)08/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically enters the play mode and the play indicator (a) illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the “PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button. The stop indicator (X) in the display illuminates and operation returns to the radio mode. To resume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP” button once again. *[AS02750(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play and then is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, the CD player will resume playing in the mode it was in when ignition was turned off. Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. When inserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and play starts at the beginning of the first track (selection). 157 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS02775(ALL)08/95] *[AS02800(ALL)08/95] Using the “SEEK” feature *[AS02825(ALL)08/95] Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button once to repeat the current playing selection. Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button to advance to the next selection. *[AS02850(ALL)08/95] Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a) half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backward and forward respectively through the tracks. *[AS02875(ALL)08/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CD player *[AS02900(ALL)08/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward) or the “REV” button (to reverse). While either button is pressed, the disc goes forward or backward at two different speeds depending on how long the button is held down. (Pressing either button for more than three seconds will speed up the process.) Release the button at the desired point (found by watching the elapsed playing time in the display or by listening to the sound during fast forward or reverse). When you have reached the beginning of track 1, the CD player will begin playing. *[AS02925(ALL)08/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fast forward button pressed, the display will show “END” and the player will go into pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP” button to begin playing the first track of the disc, press the “REV” button to back up from the end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” function to locate a desired track. The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find a particular selection on the disc. 158 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS02950(ALL)08/95] *[AS02975(ALL)08/95] Using the “SCAN” function *[AS03000(ALL)08/95] *[AS03025(ALL)08/95] *[AS03050(ALL)08/95] Special features of your CD player *[AS03075(ALL)08/95] *[AS03100(ALL)08/95] *[AS03125(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top (a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button to scan forward or reverse, respectively. The CD player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenable track for approximately eight seconds. This continues until you press the “SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While in the scan mode, the display shows the current sampled track number. ❑ Compression The compression feature will bring soft and loud passages closer together for a more consistent listening level. To turn the compression on, press the “COMP” button. When on, the compression indicator (“C”) will appear in the display. Press the button again to turn off. ❑ Automatic Disc Storage If the disc is ejected from the CD player but is not removed from the disc opening within approximately 10 seconds, the player will automatically reload the disc for storage, unless the disc is automatically ejected due to a “focus error” (disc inserted upside down). In this case, the disc will not be automatically reloaded. 159 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS03150(ALL)08/95] *[AS03175(ALL)08/95] How to eject the disc *[AS03200(ALL)08/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radio power and/or ignition is on or off. Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject the disc and resume radio operation of your audio system. % How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs *[AS03250(ALL)08/95] To ensure the continued performance of your Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the following precautions: ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never touch the playing surface. ❑ Before playing, inspect the disc for any contamination. If needed, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such as the Discwasher Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3 Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean. ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended for analog records. ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a considerable rise in temperature or damage may result. *[AS03225(ALL)08/95] *[AS03275(ALL)08/95] [AS03281(ALL)08/95] [AS03286(ALL)08/95] [AS03291(ALL)08/95] *[AS03300(ALL)08/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case. ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try *[AS03325(ALL)08/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into [AS03296(ALL)08/95] to insert another disc. Doing so may damage the disc player. the disc player. 160 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS03350(ALL)08/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. *[AS03375(ALL)08/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player *[AS03400(ALL)08/95] The following information is designed to help you recognize typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as mechanical malfunctions of the disc player. *[AS03425(ALL)08/95] *[AS03450(ALL)08/95] ❑ A disc is already loaded. ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface *[AS03475(ALL)08/95] *[AS03500(ALL)08/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective. ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above *[AS03525(ALL)08/95] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may downward. 140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool off before operating. produce discs with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may not be within industry standards or in accordance with the CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust and scratches could be defective and may not play on your Ford Compact Disc Player. 161 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 [AS03550(ALL)08/95] If play does not begin once the disc has been inserted: *[AS03575(ALL)08/95] *[AS03600(ALL)08/95] *[AS03625(ALL)08/95] ❑ The radio is not on. ❑ The unit is in the stop mode. ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses *[AS03650(ALL)08/95] *[AS03675(ALL)08/95] If the sound skips: within the unit. If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately an hour until the moisture evaporates. ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player or scratch the discs. 162 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 %*[AS03700(ALL)08/95] *[AS03725(ALL)08/95] full page art:0060631-B High-Level Audio System High-Level Audio System 163 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS03750(ALL)08/95] *[AS03775(ALL)08/95] *[AS03800(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio *[AS03825(ALL)08/95] *[AS03850(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume *[AS03875(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power was switched off. *[AS03900(ALL)08/95] *[AS03925(ALL)08/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band *[AS03950(ALL)08/95] *[AS03975(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations % How to turn the radio on and off Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. Press the +/s side of the “VOL” button to increase/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relative volume level. Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band. When in the radio mode, pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to Tune Radio Stations. There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You can manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. These four methods are described below. 164 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS04000(ALL)08/95] *[AS04025(ALL)08/95] *[AS04050(ALL)08/95] *[AS04075(ALL)08/95] [AS04100(ALL)08/95] [AS04125(ALL)08/95] [AS04150(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “TUNE” function You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time (FM changes in increments of 200 kHz; AM changes in increments of 10 kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — within approximately five seconds — pressing and releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button. Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) ❑ Using the “SEEK” function This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. ❑ Using the “SCAN” function Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scan mode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down the frequency band, again stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. 165 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 [AS04175(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. [AS04200(ALL)08/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons Your radio is equipped with 5 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10 FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). [AS04225(ALL)08/95] [AS04250(ALL)08/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies: [AS04275(ALL)08/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. [AS04300(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. [AS04325(ALL)08/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. [AS04350(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the station memory preset buttons (if programmed in auto mode) will need to be reset. *[AS04375(ALL)08/95] *[AS04400(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the Automatic Memory Load feature You can activate the Auto Memory Load feature by pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET” button for approximately three seconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the first five strong stations for the respective band and storing them in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of strong stations from the FM band.) 166 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS04425(ALL)08/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong stations into your memory buttons without losing your existing memory presets, which is especially handy while traveling. Your radio will automatically set your memory buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have to continually manually tune to existing stations. *[AS04450(ALL)08/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first five strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO”, then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily on the stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio is now in the “AUTO” mode and this display will show “AUTO” each time a preset is activated. *[AS04475(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in the frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will store the last strong station detected on the band. *[AS04500(ALL)08/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin playing the station stored on memory button 1. *[AS04525(ALL)08/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to the manually-set memory button stations (or those stations set using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, the radio will store the next set of five strong stations. 167 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS04550(ALL)08/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your radio *[AS04575(ALL)08/95] *[AS04600(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response *[AS04625(ALL)08/95] *[AS04650(ALL)08/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response *[AS04675(ALL)08/95] *[AS04700(ALL)08/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker balance *[AS04725(ALL)08/95] *[AS04750(ALL)08/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader *[AS04775(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble and positions of speaker balance and fader functions after adjustments are made, then revert to volume level set. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the “-” side to decrease bass (less “lows”). Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to increase treble (more “highs”), and push the “-” side to decrease treble (less “highs”). Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the left speakers. Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the “-” side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. 168 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 % Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player *[AS04825(ALL)08/95] *[AS04850(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape *[AS04800(ALL)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Once you insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to the right), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of the way in and play will begin after a momentary tape tightening process. Display indicates “M” (for metal/CrO2) while tape is playing. *[AS04875(ALL)08/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on whether or not the radio power is on. *[AS04900(ALL)08/95] *[AS04925(ALL)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape *[AS04950(ALL)08/95] *[AS04975(ALL)08/95] ❑ Fast forwarding the tape *[AS05000(ALL)08/95] *[AS05025(ALL)08/95] *[AS05050(ALL)08/95] ❑ Rewinding the tape There are four ways to quickly locate a desired selection on the tape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function. Following are brief descriptions of each. To fast foward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radio will automatically begin playing until fast forward is manually stopped. At the end of the tape, the direction automatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape. To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio will automatically begin playing until rewind is manually stopped or the beginning of the tape is reached. 169 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS05075(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette *[AS05100(ALL)08/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on the tape. Push the left (b) side to seek the previous tape selection. tape player *[AS05125(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currently playing tape selection, press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button after approximately three seconds into the current selection. *[AS05150(ALL)08/95] Whirling sprockets in the display (l) indicate the direction of tape travel. *[AS05175(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player *[AS05200(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode (display indicates “SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the forward scan mode on the tape currently playing, stopping on each tape selection for approximately an eight-second sampling. *[AS05225(ALL)08/95] Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the reverse scan mode, stopping on each previous tape selection for approximately an eight-second sampling. While scanning, the display indicates whirling sprockets plus an “S” (m). *[AS05250(ALL)08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tape selection press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. *[AS05275(ALL)08/95] ❑ How to change the side of the tape being played The alternate track of the tape can be selected anytime by pressing the “PLAY/PROG” button. *[AS05300(ALL)08/95] 170 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS05325(ALL)08/95] *[AS05350(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape *[AS05375(ALL)08/95] *[AS05400(ALL)08/95] How to store the tape To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing if the radio power is on. The tape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or off. Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resume radio play. The cassette will be stored in the tape player and the X symbol in the display will be lit until you push the “PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fast forward and fast rewind can be used while the tape is in storage mode without interrupting radio play. *[AS05425(ALL)08/95] *[AS05450(ALL)08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature *[AS05475(ALL)08/95] Push the k button to activate. When on, the k symbol above the button will be lit. *[AS05500(ALL)08/95] *[AS05525(ALL)08/95] *[AS05550(ALL)08/95] Clock Operation % NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. How to view the clock mode Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the frequency and time in the display. In the clock mode, pressing any radio function will automatically display the radio frequency for approximately ten seconds before changing back to the clock mode. 171 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS05575(ALL)08/95] *[AS05600(ALL)08/95] *[AS05625(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock *[AS05650(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM indications. *[AS05675(ALL)08/95] NOTE: On the High-Level Audio System, the clock can be set with the radio power on or off. *[AS05700(ALL)08/95] *[AS05725(ALL)08/95] Tape error messages *[AS05750(ALL)08/95] Error 0 — Communication error between the radio controller and the tape controller. The cassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tape again. If the same error code appears, turn the ignition off, then back on again and insert the tape. *[AS05775(ALL)08/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. The cassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert the tape again. If the same error code appears in the display, try a different cartridge. *[AS05800(ALL)08/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Your cassette tape player will go into the pause mode. Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’t eject, refer the problem to qualified personnel for service. 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button, press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advance the hours and right (a) to advance the minutes. Your cassette tape player is equipped to diagnose certain problems you may experience. Error codes are as follows: 172 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS05825(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes *[AS05850(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: *[AS05875(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to *[AS05900(ALL)08/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or *[AS05925(ALL)08/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct *[AS05950(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it *[AS05975(ALL)08/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become *[AS06000(ALL)08/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. before playing by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and turning the hub until the tape is tight. lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting cassette. player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. 173 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS06550(ALL)08/95] % full page art:0060586-C Electronic Stereo Radio 174 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS06575(ALL)08/95] full page art:0060587-C Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette 175 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 % Electronic Stereo and Stereo Cassette Radios *[AS06625(ALL)08/95] *[AS06650(ALL)08/95] *[AS06675(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio *[AS06600(ALL)08/95] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio) There are three ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station or select the station by using the memory preset buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. % How to tune radio stations (Stereo Cassette Radio) *[AS06725(ALL)08/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using Automatic Music Search (“AMS”), “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. *[AS06750(ALL)08/95] *[AS06775(ALL)05/95] ❑ Using the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio) *[AS06800(ALL)08/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) *[AS06700(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by pressing and releasing either the right (+) or left (s) side of the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “TUNE” button. 176 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS06825(ALL)08/95] [AS06850(ALL)08/95] *[AS06875(ALL)08/95] [AS06900(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “AMS” function to manually tune your radio (Stereo Cassette Radio) You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by first pressing the “AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) then within approximately five seconds pressing and releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button. ❑ Using the “SEEK” function Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. *[AS07000(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo Cassette *[AS07025(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The radio will begin scanning up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a second time. Radio) % Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player *[AS07075(ALL)08/95] *[AS07100(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape *[AS07125(ALL)08/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on whether or not the radio power is on. *[AS07050(ALL)08/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the right) firmly into the tape door opening, making sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.” 177 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS07150(ALL)08/95] *[AS07175(ALL)08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape ❑ Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will appear in the display). Then, push the left (h) button to rewind to the beginning of the current selection or press the right (g) button to fast forward to the beginning of the next selection. [AS07200(ALL)08/95] *[AS07225(ALL)08/95] ❑ How to change the side of the tape being played The alternate track (other side) of the tape can be selected at any time by pushing both fast-wind buttons (h and g) at the same time. [AS07250(ALL)08/95] *[AS07275(ALL)08/95] *[AS07300(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape *[AS07325(ALL)08/95] *[AS07350(ALL)08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature *[AS07375(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. *[AS07400(ALL)08/95] *[AS07425(ALL)08/95] How to view the clock mode To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing. Push the k/memory preset #3 button to activate. Push again to deactivate. Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate the frequency and time in the display. In the clock mode, pressing any radio function will automatically display the radio frequency for approximatedly ten seconds before changing back to the clock mode. 178 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS07450(ALL)08/95] *[AS07475(ALL)08/95] *[AS07500(ALL)08/95] *[AS07525(ALL)08/95] How to set the clock 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button, press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advance the hours and right (a) to advance the minutes. NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM indications. *[AS07550(ALL)08/95] *[AS07575(ALL)08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes *[AS07600(ALL)08/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: *[AS07625(ALL)08/95] clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. *[AS07650(ALL)08/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct *[AS07675(ALL)08/95] *[AS07700(ALL)08/95] *[AS07725(ALL)08/95] sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playing by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and turning the hub until the tape is tight. ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting a cassette. ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not in use. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. 179 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS07730(ALL)08/95] *[AS07735(ALL)08/95] Rear Seat Radio Controls Using the Rear Seat Radio Controls [AS07740(ALL)08/95] Rear seat radio controls are available on all Aerostar models. [AS07745(ALL)08/95] The rear seat radio controls are located behind the driver on the left hand side of the vehicle. These controls duplicate several radio functions of the radio and allow the use of headphones in the vehicle. [AS07750(ALL)08/95] one inch art:0060647-B Rear seat radio controls [AS07755(ALL)08/95] How to turn the rear seat radio controls on and off [AS07760(ALL)08/95] Press memory preset buttons “1” and “3” simultaneously on the face of your radio to turn the rear seat radio controls on. A headphones symbol (j) will appear in the display when the rear seat controls are on. Press “1” and “3” simultaneously again to turn the rear seat radio controls off. [AS07765(ALL)08/95] How to adjust the volume [AS07770(ALL)08/95] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” rocker switch to increase volume; and push the left (s) side to decrease the volume of the rear speakers. [AS07775(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Rear seat control volume can be set no higher than current radio setting unless speakers are turned off. See note under How to turn the speakers on and off. 180 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 [AS07780(ALL)08/95] Setting the AM or FM frequency band [AS07785(ALL)08/95] Push the “BAND” button to change the frequency band. [AS07790(ALL)08/95] Using the “MEMORY” button [AS07795(ALL)08/95] Push the “MEMORY” button to access the station you have set into memory button 1 on the face of the radio. Successively pushing this button will access, numerically, all stations set into the Station Memory Preset buttons (1 through 5). [AS07800(ALL)08/95] How to turn the speakers on and off [AS07805(ALL)08/95] When the rear seat controls are on, push the “SPKRS ON-OFF” button to turn all speakers off. Push again to turn all speakers on. [AS07810(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Turning the ignition off then on again will not turn the speakers back on, if previously turned off by the “SPKRS ON-OFF” button on the rear seat controls. [AS07815(ALL)08/95] Using the “SEEK” function [AS07820(ALL)08/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch to seek to the next radio station. Press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch to seek to the previous radio station. [AS07825(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When using the rear seat controls with a High-Level Audio System, the “SEEK” function on the rear seat controls will also function with cassettes, seeking the next (“SEEK a”) or previous (“b SEEK”) selection on the tape. 181 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 [AS07850(ALL)00/95] Using headphones with the rear seat controls [AS07855(ALL)08/95] Two 3.5mm headphone jacks have been provided on the rear seat controls. Plug headphone(s) into the provided jack(s) to operate. *[AS07860(ALL)08/95] *[AS07865(ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions *[AS07870(ALL)08/95] *[AS07875(ALL)08/95] 1. *[AS07880(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna (whether you have a power antenna or a manually adjustable antenna) is fully extended to its maximum length for proper reception. If your antenna is not fully extended, you may experience signal loss while traveling in fringe reception areas. *[AS07885(ALL)08/95] *[AS07890(ALL)08/95] 2. *[AS07895(ALL)08/95] If there is a building or large structure between the antenna and station, some of the signal “bends” around the building, but certain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the “shadow” of the structure will allow the station to return to normal. % Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completely clear and noise-free, such as the following: Distance/Strength The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM signal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signal becomes weaker. Terrain The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area over which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being noise-free. 182 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 *[AS07900(ALL)08/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are most prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quite severe in hilly terrain and depressed roadways. *[AS07905(ALL)08/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit has been incorporated into this system. This feature automatically switches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal, which improves the quality of reception. *[AS07910(ALL)08/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions on AM frequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. *[AS07915(ALL)08/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture and Overload. This can occur when listening to a weak station and when passing another broadcast tower. The close station may capture the more distant station, although the displayed frequency does not change. While passing the tower, the station may switch back and forth a few times before returning to the original station. *[AS07920(ALL)08/95] When several broadcast towers are present (common in metropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver, resulting in considerable station changing, mixing and distortion. *[AS07925(ALL)08/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands has been incorporated into this system to reduce strong signal capture and overload. 183 File:09cpasa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:42:51 1995 % *[AS07930(ALL)08/95] *[AS07935(ALL)08/95] *[AS07940(ALL)08/95] *[AS08175(ALL)08/95] All About Radio Frequencies The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies that AM and FM radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps. Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radio will tune to each of these frequencies using manual tune and no fine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use other frequencies. Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequency which is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. For example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM broadcast frequency. % Important Warranty and Service Information *[AS08225(ALL)08/95] *[AS08250(ALL)08/95] Warranty *[AS08275(ALL)08/95] *[AS08300(ALL)08/95] Service *[AS08200(ALL)08/95] Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for a copy of this limited warranty. At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with a comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should go wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealer for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist you. 184 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 Driving Your Aerostar [DR00300(ALL)08/95] Automatic Transmission Operation (4R44E/4R55E) *[DR00350(ALL)08/95] The 4R44E and 4R55E transmissions are electronically controlled four speed overdrive automatic transmissions with lockup torque converter. Transmission operation is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). *[DR00425(ALL)08/95] The PCM will automatically adjust transmission operation to make up for varying conditions. Several sensors located on the engine and transmission such as throttle position, engine speed, vehicle speed and transmission temperature are used by the PCM to shift the transmission into a higher or lower gear when required for the best performance and fuel economy. For example, you may notice that the transmission will upshift to a higher gear more quickly when the vehicle has not reached normal operating temperature. *[DR00475(ALL)08/95] The PCM also controls the transmission’s Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) to further raise vehicle performance and fuel economy. The TCC will engage when the transmission operating temperature and other conditions determined by the PCM have been met. Engagement of the clutch may be noted as a decrease in engine speed. [DR00500(ALL)08/95] To help in troubleshooting, the PCM continually performs self-tests on the electronic control system and, if any faults are detected, stores them in memory. The Overdrive Off Indicator Light (O/D OFF), which is located on the 185 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 gearshift lever, may flash steadily if a malfunction has been detected. If the Overdrive Off Indicator Light is flashing, contact your Ford dealer as soon as possible. If this condition persists, damage to the transmission could occur. *[DR00700(ALL)03/95] Some vehicles are equipped with a Powertrain Control Module that limits engine speeds with a cut-out mode to promote durability. [DR05700(ALL)06/95] Automatic Overdrive Transmission % Putting Your Vehicle in Gear [DR05800(ALL)03/93] Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steering column. You can put the gearshift in any one of several positions. *[DR05750(ALL)01/95] [DR06001(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095027-A The positions of the column-mounted gearshift *[DR06200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from position to position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. 186 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR06300(ALL)01/95] Once you place the gearshift securely into position, gradually release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary. % NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature. This feature prevents you from shifting from P (Park) unless you have the brake pedal depressed. (The ignition must be in the ON position.) If you cannot shift from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: *[DR06320(ALL)01/95] *[DR06330(ALL)01/95] *[DR06340(ALL)08/95] 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Remove the key. 3. Insert the key and rotate it one position clockwise (ignition in the OFF position). *[DR06350(ALL)08/95] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted back to P [Park], you must repeat the previous steps.) *[DR06360(ALL)01/95] *[DR06370(ALL)07/95] 5. Start the vehicle. *[DR06310(ALL)01/95] *[DR06375(ALL)05/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Aerostar in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. RWARNING DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. 187 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR06401(ALL)01/95] *[DR06501(ALL)02/95] R (Reverse) *[DR06520(ALL)01/95] N (Neutral) [DR06550(ALL)08/95] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the vehicle are not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline, unless the parking brake or brakes are on. *[DR06601(ALL)01/95] % [DR06700(ALL)04/95] * Driving [DR06800(ALL)08/95] This is the normal driving position. As the vehicle picks up speed, automatic upshifts to second, third and fourth gears will occur when j Overdrive is chosen on the selector and the transmission control switch has not been pressed. The transmission will shift into the correct gear when the right speed is achieved, for the accelerator pedal position you have chosen. [DR06810(ALL)08/95] When to use Drive [DR06830(ALL)08/95] You will note there is not a drive position on your gearshift indicator. However, you will find a transmission control switch labeled OVERDRIVE OFF located on the end of the gearshift lever. Press this switch and the indicator light (OFF) illuminates on the gearshift lever. With overdrive cancelled and the word OFF illuminated, the transmission will operate in gears one through three. This is useful if you experience frequent downshift/upshift conditions, when operating with a heavy load or in hilly terrain, or if additional engine braking is % % With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle will move backward. You should always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse). When to use j (Overdrive) 188 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 useful. However, shift back to j (Overdrive) whenever practical for optimum powertrain cooling and fuel economy. This can be accomplished by pushing the transmission control switch again, to cancel the OVERDRIVE OFF control and light. [DR06850(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095028-A *[DR07100(ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second) [DR07200(ALL)06/92] With the gearshift in the 2 (Second) gear position more engine braking is provided. Use 2 (Second) gear to drive up moderately steep grades, to start up slippery roads, or to provide moderate engine braking on downgrades. DO NOT GO FASTER THAN 55 mph (88 km/h) IN THIS GEARSHIFT POSITION. *[DR07400(ALL)01/95] When to use 1 (Low) [DR07500(ALL)06/92] With the gearshift in the 1 (First) gear position maximum engine braking is provided. This position provides 1 (First) gear operation only with no automatic upshifts. To obtain upshifts the gearshift must be moved out of this position. Use 1 (First) gear to drive up steep grades, or to provide maximum engine braking on downgrades. 189 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR07600(ALL)01/95] P (Park) [DR07700(ALL)06/92] Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. [DR07800(ALL)06/92] To securely latch the gearshift in the P (Park) position, pull it toward you, push it completely counterclockwise against the stop, and then push it toward the instrument panel. *[DR08000(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[DR08100(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running. *[DR08500(ALL)06/94] [DR08600(ALL)08/95] Forced Downshifts To gain acceleration in j (Overdrive) or Drive (j position with Overdrive cancelled) when passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will downshift to 2 (Second) gear or to 1 (First) gear at calibrated speeds. *[DR11235(ALL)03/94] *[DR11275(ALL)03/94] Power Braking *[DR11285(ALL)03/94] NOTE: Continued operation in the stall condition can result in transmission overheat, malfunction or fluid expulsion. Increasing the engine speed above idle without vehicle movement (such as holding the brake) in a forward or reverse gear causes transmission stall. 190 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 % *[DR15915(ALL)01/95] % [DR15945(ALL)01/95] * Steering Your Vehicle Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle. % If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort. *[DR15960(ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than five seconds if the engine is running. This can damage the power steering pump. *[DR15985(ALL)05/90] NOTE: After any severe impact such as striking large potholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads, or a collision involving the front end, observe the steering wheel alignment. If the spokes of the steering wheel seem to be in a different position while going straight down the road, have the front suspension and steering checked for possible damage. [DR16005(ALL)06/95] Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD) (If equipped) [DR16015(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the E-4WD option, power is provided to all four wheels whenever you press the accelerator pedal. It improves both handling and traction during difficult driving conditions, adjusting automatically to your driving needs. Because the entire E-4WD system is controlled by a microprocessor, your vehicle is not equipped with the switch or shift lever used with most traditional 4WD vehicles. The microprocessor does all the adjusting for you. *[DR15950(ALL)04/95] 191 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 [DR16025(ALL)05/94] How the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD) System Works [DR16036(ALL)03/90] Under normal driving conditions, when the road is firm, dry and level, the engine power is distributed one-third to the front axle and two-thirds to the rear axle. However, if a wheel begins to slip, the microprocessor will sense this condition and signal the system to transmit more power to the axle with more traction. (You may feel a momentary surge of power.) [DR16046(ALL)06/95] NOTE: The microprocessor is disabled when the brakes are applied or when the transmission selector is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions. [DR16055(ALL)05/94] Driving Your Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD) Vehicle [DR16065(ALL)03/95] Since your E-4WD vehicle is unique, follow these steps to be safe: [DR16075(ALL)03/95] ❑ Avoid unnecessary turns or other maneuvers that could cause loss of control and possible injury. [DR16076(ALL)06/95] ❑ Use the same size and type of tire and wheel as originally provided for your vehicle and inflate the tires to the manufacturer’s recommended air pressure. [DR16077(ALL)03/95] ❑ Become familiar with your vehicle’s operating characteristics and study this Owner Guide for specific operating instructions. Be sure all occupants wear the safety belts provided. Drive cautiously, defensively, and at speeds safe for current road conditions. 192 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 [DR16095(ALL)06/95] ❑ Do not let the added driving traction of E-4WD lead you to believe that you can stop any quicker than a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle. The added traction performance does not improve the braking ability of the E-4WD vehicle. Allow the same amount of distance when braking as with a two-wheel drive vehicle. [DR16096(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Your E-4WD Aerostar is a passenger vehicle designed for on-road use; it is not intended for any off-road use. [DR16097(ALL)05/95] RWARNING On-vehicle wheel balancing will cause damage to the drivetrain of E-4WD Aerostars. *[DR21400(ALL)03/95] *[DR21500(ALL)01/93] *[DR21600(ALL)06/95] % *[DR21900(ALL)10/94] *[DR22000(ALL)08/95] Brakes Front Disc Brakes The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not require service other than periodic inspection for pad wear. Rear Drum Brakes The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting. Automatic adjustment occurs when the brakes are applied while “backing up.” If normal operation does not include much backing, adjust the brakes when they seem “low,” using the procedure under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low” in this chapter. 193 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR22100(ALL)11/89] *[DR22200(ALL)08/94] Hydraulic Power Brakes *[DR22300(ALL)11/89] The brake light in the instrument cluster will light for low brake fluid in the common brake fluid reservoir. The hydraulic brake system is made up of two independent hydraulic circuits. One hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to the front disc brakes and the other hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to the rear drum brakes. These two circuits are supplied by a common hydraulic brake fluid reservoir, with a fluid level sensor. *[DR22400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING An increase in pedal travel will result in reduced braking capability. The brake system should be checked immediately. % Rear Anti-lock Brakes [DR22700(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a rear Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). This system prevents at least one and often both rear wheels from completely locking up when the brakes are applied in a panic stop, for example. *[DR22800(ALL)07/94] Even with the Anti-lock Brake System, you should be careful when braking. Front brake lock up on any surface, even on smooth pavement causes loss of steering control. Heavy braking on roads with loose surfaces such as snow or gravel, or severe pavement irregularities could also cause you to lose steering control of your vehicle. *[DR22500(ALL)10/94] 194 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR22900(ALL)05/95] RWARNING If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or comes on while driving, have the braking system checked by a qualified service technician as soon as possible. *[DR22910(ALL)07/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled but normal brake function remains operational. *[DR23000(ALL)12/89] If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low” % *[DR23200(ALL)07/95] If brakes do not grip well, it may indicate the rear drum brakes need adjustment. To do this, drive the vehicle in reverse at 5 mph (8 km/h) on level, dry pavement. Stop the vehicle by firmly applying the brakes. Repeat this procedure four or five times. *[DR23250(ALL)11/89] If during normal operation the brake pedal seems “low”, it may indicate the need for a brake system inspection and/or service. You should have your brakes checked as soon as possible. % *[DR23300(ALL)07/95] % Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does not affect the function of the brake system and is normal. However, if the squeal becomes louder or more frequent, have your brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified service technician. 195 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR23400(ALL)11/89] RWARNING Modifications to the suspension spring rates and/or vehicle ride height may adversely affect vehicle stopping ability. *[DR23500(ALL)07/92] *[DR23600(ALL)05/95] *[DR23700(ALL)07/95] If Brakes Pull *[DR23800(ALL)05/95] If pull occurs during the first 500 miles (800 km), make 10 moderately fast stops from 40 mph (65 km/h) and then perform the self-adjustment procedure above. It may be necessary to repeat this operation to properly seat new brake linings and pads. *[DR24000(ALL)01/93] *[DR24100(ALL)11/89] Stopping Distances *[DR24200(ALL)01/95] *[DR24300(ALL)05/95] Applying the Brakes *[DR24500(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do not apply your brakes continuously. If you apply your brakes continuously, they may overheat and become less effective. % % ❑ Check tire pressure. ❑ Perform the self-adjustment procedure described under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low.” Stopping distances vary with different loads and driving conditions. Use caution when encountering new conditions and acquaint yourself with vehicle performance. Take full advantage of engine braking power when slowing down. Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This allows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing down, which lets you steer properly. 196 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR24600(ALL)03/95] *[DR24650(ALL)01/95] Parking Brake [DR24700(ALL)01/89] The parking brake is a hand operated lever located on the floor of your van just to the right of the driver’s seat. [DR24750(ALL)12/91] To set the parking brake while parking your van, press the brake pedal with your right foot and hold it while you fully apply the parking brake lever. [DR24900(ALL)08/95] To release the parking brake, press the brake pedal with your right foot, depress the release button in the parking brake lever while pulling up on the lever, and then lower the lever all the way to the floor. % The parking brake should be used whenever you park your vehicle. [DR24910(ALL)11/89] quarter page art:0020566-A Parking Brake *[DR24960(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you leave your vehicle. 197 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR25050(ALL)01/93] RWARNING If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake System light remains on, have the brakes checked immediately. They may not be working properly. *[DR25100(ALL)06/95] The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. *[DR25200(ALL)01/95] % [DR25250(ALL)01/95] * *[DR25301(ALL)07/95] Driving Under Special Conditions % Tips for Safe Driving As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handle differently from your previous vehicle. Use care until you become accustomed to its various features and driving characteristics. *[DR25350(ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than anticipated. *[DR25401(ALL)02/95] ❑ Extreme braking can cause the front wheels to lock and slide, making it difficult to control the direction of the vehicle. Use a “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal with steadily increasing force. This allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the “squeeze” technique. 198 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR25450(ALL)02/95] ❑ Abruptly releasing the accelerator or braking *[DR25475(ALL)08/95] If you run off the road, do not turn the steering wheel sharply to return to the road. Instead, slow the vehicle sufficiently and gradually steer the vehicle back onto the road. *[DR25501(ALL)02/95] *[DR25550(ALL)11/92] Wheel Spin [DR25601(ALL)08/95] If the wheels spin during vehicle start-up, shift to second gear. *[DR26301(ALL)01/89] Move forward slowly and evenly. If this does not work, try rocking the vehicle. *[DR26550(ALL)05/90] *[DR26590(ALL)07/95] High Speed Driving % *[DR26601(ALL)05/95] hard when your vehicle is in a severe curve at a speed which is high in relationship to the severity of the curve (and other factors like road, weather, and tire conditions) may cause the vehicle to change its direction of travel. If possible, avoid application of the brakes. If braking is necessary, it should be done by using the “squeeze” technique described earlier. ❑ Extreme acceleration can cause the rear wheels to spin, perhaps resulting in reduced steering control. Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. RWARNING Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. 199 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR26625(ALL)12/91] *[DR26652(ALL)05/95] Speed limiter *[DR26701(ALL)01/95] % [DR26750(ALL)01/95] * *[DR26801(ALL)03/95] *[DR26850(ALL)03/95] Driving in Bad Weather *[DR26901(ALL)01/95] *[DR26951(ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive slower than you normally would. ❑ Give your vehicle more distance to stop. ❑ To stop on ice, shift to N (Neutral) below 10 % [DR27025(ALL)08/95] All models are equipped with an Electronic Engine Control (EEC) system which limits the maximum engine speed and thus road speed in top gear. Vehicle operation is normal since the controlled maximum speed is above posted highway speeds in North America. Slippery roads Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads: ❑ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary. mph (16 km/h) and gently pump brakes (except with rear anti-lock brakes). *[DR27050(ALL)02/93] *[DR27201(ALL)07/95] ❑ Consider using one of the lower gears. RWARNING To avoid skidding and losing control on slippery roads, do not downshift into 1 (First) when you are moving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). *[DR27401(ALL)01/93] RWARNING The Anti-Lock Brake System may not prevent brake lock-up on extremely slippery surfaces. 200 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR27450(ALL)03/95] *[DR27501(ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped) *[DR27550(ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. *[DR27651(ALL)01/95] *[DR27675(ALL)06/92] High water *[DR27701(ALL)05/90] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that the water is below the bottom of the wheel hubs. *[DR27750(ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You may have limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual. *[DR27801(ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakes gently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the brakes. *[DR27820(ALL)06/95] NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. *[DR27825(ALL)03/93] NOTE: All rear axle lube quantities must be replaced every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or if the axle has been submerged in water. Otherwise, the lube should not be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. % % This axle provides added drive away traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surface with poor traction. Never attempt to cross water that is fast flowing or of unknown depth. 201 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR27850(ALL)11/89] *[DR27950(ALL)05/95] Rocking the vehicle If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), you may rock it out of the spot. Shift in a steady rhythm between forward and reverse gears. Allow the transmission to fully engage, then press lightly on the accelerator. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. This may overheat the engine and transmission, causing damage to both. In addition, other vehicle systems and components may also be damaged. *[DR27975(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. *[DR28050(ALL)03/95] *[DR28101(ALL)01/95] % *[DR28150(ALL)08/95] Driving With a Heavy Load There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers and cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never be more than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle. The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higher weight limits than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR. Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR and GAWR limitations. 202 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR28201(ALL)02/95] RWARNING If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged or you may lose control and injure someone. *[DR28750(ALL)01/93] *[DR28801(ALL)06/92] Vehicle/Trailer Loads *[DR29001(ALL)03/91] Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of trailer you tow. *[DR29025(ALL)09/92] Your trailer towing capability will vary based on the standard and optional equipment on your vehicle. Refer to the following Vehicle Loading/Towing Information and the Trailer Towing Tables to determine the specific towing capability of your vehicle. *[DR29050(ALL)02/92] *[DR29101(ALL)01/95] ❑ Stay within the load limits when you tow. ❑ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your All vehicles may tow a Class I trailer provided the Gross Combined Weight (GCW) is less than or equal to the GVWR shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. For heavier trailer applications, refer to the towing information found later in this chapter. vehicle for towing, making sure to use the right equipment and to attach it properly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.) 203 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR29151(ALL)01/95] ❑ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle *[DR29201(ALL)01/95] ❑ Service your vehicle more frequently if you [DR29250(ALL)03/90] Standard length vehicles adapted for trailer tow may require relocation of the underbody spare tire. It is recommended that you secure the tire under the rear-most seat using the hold-down hardware located with the jack. while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in this chapter.) tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.) [DR29301(ALL)03/91] one third page art:0020268-A Spare tire stowage (standard length model) *[DR29350(ALL)05/94] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 500 miles (800 km). 204 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 % Vehicle Loading/Towing Information *[DR29450(ALL)03/91] Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space with large or heavy loads. Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as tire, rim sizes and inflation pressures are specified for your vehicle at the assembly plant on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The Certification Label is located on the left front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar. *[DR29501(ALL)12/91] Trucks, unlike passenger cars, are basically custom vehicles designed to carry a load. Most owners start with a base vehicle and add production and dealer installed and/or aftermarket components to suit their tastes and purposes. Even trucks that are purchased for personal transportation only are likely to have considerable optional equipment, such as step bumpers and light bars, for example. *[DR29401(ALL)06/92] [DR29504(ALL)08/95] RWARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 205 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 [DR29510(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Do not allow people to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. [DR29520(ALL)08/95] RWARNING Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. *[DR29525(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harm to passengers. *[DR29551(ALL)03/91] Each additional item of equipment affects how much cargo a vehicle can carry. If a vehicle is overloaded, performance will suffer and service concerns may arise. 206 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR29601(ALL)04/95] The following is a typical example of a Safety Compliance Certification Label and an explanation of how this information should be used: [DR29650(ALL)05/94] half page art:0020148-G Safety Compliance Certification Label *[DR29950(ALL)06/92] Do not use the sample numbers on the Safety Compliance Certification Label shown. Use the actual numbers from your vehicle certification label. *[DR30001(ALL)06/92] Understanding Loading/Towing Information *[DR30050(ALL)03/94] The following terms are used to describe the ability to carry or tow a load: *[DR30101(ALL)01/93] *[DR30150(ALL)01/93] *[DR30200(ALL)01/93] *[DR30250(ALL)01/93] ❑ Base Curb Weight ❑ Payload ❑ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ❑ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 207 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR30301(ALL)01/93] [DR30305(ALL)08/95] [DR30307(ALL)08/95] *[DR30310(ALL)06/92] *[DR30320(ALL)06/92] *[DR30330(ALL)06/92] *[DR30340(ALL)06/92] *[DR30351(ALL)03/91] *[DR30401(ALL)03/94] ❑ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ❑ GAWR F (Gross Axle Weight Rating Front) ❑ GAWR R (Gross Axle Weight Rating Rear) ❑ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) ❑ Maximum Trailer Weight Rating ❑ Maximum Trailer Weight ❑ Trailer Weight Range Base Curb Weight The Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including fuel, coolants, lubricants, emergency tools, spare wheel and tire. It also includes any equipment that is standard on that model. It does not include passengers, cargo or optional equipment installed by factory, dealer, aftermarket supplier or customer. *[DR30451(ALL)03/91] *[DR30501(ALL)03/91] Payload *[DR30550(ALL)03/91] *[DR30650(ALL)08/95] Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) Payload is the combined, maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants and optional equipment that the truck is designed to carry. It is Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus the base curb weight. It is important to remember that GVW is not a limit or a specification. If an owner loads up a vehicle and weighs it, that’s the GVW at that moment. If the owner piles on more of a load and weighs it again, that becomes the GVW. 208 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR30701(ALL)03/91] *[DR30750(ALL)10/94] Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) *[DR30801(ALL)01/93] *[DR30850(ALL)03/91] Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) *[DR30901(ALL)03/91] Your Safety Compliance Certification Label not only gives the GVWR, it also gives the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) which is the carrying capacity for each axle system. For trucks, the rear axle will be designed to carry more weight than the front. *[DR30950(ALL)06/92] The rating is based on the carrying capacity of the lowest rated axle and suspension component as well as other factors. This is why it’s so important to observe vehicle loading ratings. Overloading a vehicle punishes components and can lead to shortened service life or outright failure. *[DR31001(ALL)06/92] The capacity of the tires is included as part of the axle and suspension system, which is to be considered when determining the lowest rated component. Tires are rated to carry a specific maximum load at a specific maximum tire pressure. % % To avoid overloading a vehicle, the owner should observe the manufacturer’s specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. The GVWR is the maximum total weight of base vehicle, passengers, optional components and cargo that a particular vehicle was designed to carry. We have all seen a car or a truck that is loaded down in the rear and riding high in the front. This is a dangerous condition that usually means that the rear suspension components are under severe strain and that vehicle handling is impaired. There is more to carrying a load than just payload or GVWR. 209 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR31050(ALL)06/92] Passenger car type tires when installed on light trucks and multipurpose passenger vehicles are rated at 10% lower load carrying capacity due to the differences in vehicle usages. *[DR31101(ALL)05/95] The vehicle must not be loaded to both the front and rear GAWR because the GVWR will be exceeded. The GAWR of the front and rear axles exceeds the GVWR when added together to allow flexibility in fore and aft loading of cargo. *[DR31110(ALL)06/92] With the tires inflated to the specified pressure the total weight of your vehicle must not exceed the GVWR and GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. This includes full fuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants as well as the cargo load. *[DR31120(ALL)06/92] *[DR31130(ALL)06/92] GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) *[DR31140(ALL)06/92] *[DR31150(ALL)05/95] Maximum Trailer Weight Rating GCWR is the maximum combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer. The GCWR is specified by the manufacturer to indicate the combined maximum loaded weight that the vehicle is designed to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is the maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. It is specified by the manufacturer and is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. 210 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR31160(ALL)06/92] *[DR31170(ALL)05/95] Maximum Trailer Weight *[DR31180(ALL)06/92] *[DR31190(ALL)06/92] Trailer Weight Range *[DR31301(ALL)03/91] *[DR31350(ALL)03/91] Calculating The Load *[DR31401(ALL)12/91] ❑ Obtain ratings from your Safety Compliance *[DR31450(ALL)07/95] — Refer to the following sample illustration to locate the various ratings on your Safety Compliance Certification Label. *[DR31501(ALL)03/91] — If you do not plan on pulling a trailer, do not include these ratings into your calculations. % The maximum trailer weight is the maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle is permitted to tow. It is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. The trailer weight range is a specified range by weight, which the trailer must fall within, ranging from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. To know how much weight your vehicle can carry: Certification Label, and the Trailer towing specifications in the owner guide (refer to the Index) *[DR31550(ALL)08/95] ❑ Weigh your vehicle as you customarily *[DR31601(ALL)03/91] ❑ Subtract the total weight of passengers, driver operate the vehicle (without cargo). and optional equipment added by the factory, dealer or aftermarket supplier to determine how much cargo weight you can carry. 211 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR31702(ALL)03/91] If you suspect that your payload is excessive, have your vehicle weighed at a highway weigh station or appropriate commercial facility. Weigh the total vehicle and trailer (if applicable), then separately weigh the vehicle at the front and rear wheels. And finally, weigh the trailer separately if applicable. *[DR31751(ALL)03/91] Use this chart to perform your calculations. [DR31805(ALL)03/95] twenty-six pica chart:0021098-B 212 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR31851(ALL)03/91] NOTE: The Truck Safety Compliance Certification Label has two weight related entries that sometimes cause confusion. *[DR31901(ALL)08/95] Front Axle Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): If this value is given as 83 pounds (38 kgs) on the label, does this mean that you are limited to adding only 83 pounds (38 kgs) of accessories to the front end capacity? Not exactly. This says that you can load 83 pounds (38 kgs) of options on the front axle, add 150 pound (68 kgs) passengers to all seating positions, and add evenly distributed cargo in the box without exceeding the GAWR F. *[DR31950(ALL)06/92] It is possible to hang heavier equipment on the front as long as the vehicle owner/operator compensates. This can be accomplished, if necessary, by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo or positioning cargo more toward the rear, which has the effect of reducing the load on the front. Keep in mind that the GAWR F, GAWR R, nor the GVWR should ever be exceeded. *[DR32001(ALL)08/95] Total Accessory Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): If, for example, this value is given as 112 pounds (51 kgs), does this mean that you are limited to adding 112 pounds (51 kgs) of accessories to your vehicle? Not exactly. This is a number that is related to government crash test standards, and only indirectly reflects on the amount of accessory weight that can be carried. *[DR32050(ALL)06/94] In the case of both these numbers (83 and 112 pounds) (38 and 51 kgs), the important thing to remember is that for safe operation, an owner/operator should calculate the amount and the distribution of all weights (passengers, accessory equipment and cargo). These combined weights should fall below the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR. 213 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR32201(ALL)01/93] *[DR32251(ALL)10/94] *[DR32301(ALL)01/95] Trailers Towing a trailer safely means having the proper weight on the tongue (usually 10% of the trailer weight). Load-equalizing hitches on large rigs may transfer weight to each of the vehicle’s axles. This weight must be included in capacity calculations when determining if the vehicle is loaded within safe limits. If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly. *[DR32350(ALL)02/95] RWARNING If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged or you may lose control and injure someone. *[DR32401(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage, structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury. *[DR32450(ALL)05/95] *[DR32500(ALL)03/91] *[DR32551(ALL)03/91] Use the Safety Compliance Certification Label to find the axle code number and the engine type for your vehicle. Use the appropriate Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) chart to find the Maximum GCWR for your type engine and rear axle ratio. Subtract your Loaded Vehicle Weight from the Maximum GCWR found in the chart. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shown under Trailer Weight on the chart. 214 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 [DR33400(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095089-A 215 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 [DR33500(ALL)12/91] twelve pica chart:0020157-D 216 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR33645(ALL)06/94] Automatic Transmissions [DR33650(ALL)08/95] thirty-four pica chart:0095069-A 217 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR36500(ALL)01/95] *[DR36550(ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow [DR36560(ALL)03/91] Under certain circumstances, the trailer frontal area is not to exceed the base vehicle frontal area, no matter what size engine your vehicle has: [DR36570(ALL)03/91] ❑ If you drive on roads with steep grades or on For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. If you are not certain that you are using the right equipment in the proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. roads with moderate grades that are 5 miles (8 km) or longer. [DR36580(ALL)03/91] ❑ If outside temperature in which you travel is above 100˚F (38˚C). *[DR36600(ALL)01/93] *[DR36650(ALL)01/95] Hitches *[DR36800(ALL)12/91] Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if installed properly. Follow towing instructions of a reputable rental agency. *[DR37000(ALL)12/92] Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious gases or water from entering. % For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for trailers over 2,000 lb (907 kg). 218 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR37800(ALL)07/95] *[DR37900(ALL)12/92] Safety Chains *[DR38000(ALL)08/95] *[DR38100(ALL)03/95] Trailer Brakes % % Always use safety chains between your vehicle and trailer. Cross chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. Connect safety chains to the vehicle frame or hook retainers. Never attach chains to the bumper. Separate trailer brakes are required on most towed vehicles weighing over 1,500 lb (680 kg). *[DR38200(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. *[DR38300(ALL)06/95] *[DR38400(ALL)11/89] Trailer Lamps *[DR38425(ALL)03/91] Class I and Class II Trailer Tow electrical wiring provides two circuits (right hand and left hand) to operate trailer stop/turn tail lamps. Each stop/turn circuit will operate one combination stop/turn light bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357) on the trailer. Never add more than one trailer light bulb to one circuit. *[DR38450(ALL)05/95] RWARNING % Make sure your trailer lamps conform to Federal and local regulations. Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. 219 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR38500(ALL)06/95] *[DR38520(ALL)05/95] Driving while you tow Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can brake gradually. % If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long, steep grades, the speed control may shut off. [DR38600(ALL)08/95] When towing a trailer in hilly terrain, with a vehicle equipped with an automatic overdrive transmission, you may wish to operate in Drive (by cancelling Overdrive with OVERDRIVE OFF button) rather than k (Overdrive). This will eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting to maintain speed. Switch back to Overdrive whenever practical for optimum powertrain cooling. This can be accomplished by pushing in the switch located on the end of the indicator lever. *[DR38800(ALL)06/95] When descending a steep grade with a trailer, operate in Drive rather than Overdrive. If additional braking is needed, shift the automatic transmission gearshift into 2 (Second) gear or 1 (Low). [DR38925(ALL)08/95] Servicing your vehicle if you tow *[DR38950(ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional information. *[DR38540(ALL)01/95] 220 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR39000(ALL)08/95] *[DR39100(ALL)11/89] Trailer Towing Tips *[DR39200(ALL)05/90] Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, with someone outside at the rear of your trailer to guide you. Place your hand at the bottom of the steering wheel and move it in the direction you want the rear of the trailer to swing. Slight movement of the steering wheel results in a much larger movement of the rear of the trailer. *[DR39300(ALL)11/89] Allow more room for stopping with a trailer attached. Trailer brakes should be applied first, whether manually or automatically controlled, when approaching a stop. *[DR39400(ALL)11/89] For a good handling truck-trailer combination, the trailer tongue load should be approximately 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. *[DR39500(ALL)05/95] Make a thorough check of your equipment before starting out on the road. After you have traveled about 50 miles (80 km) stop in a protected area and double-check your hitch and electrical connections. Also check trailer wheel lug nuts for tightness. Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing in an area away from heavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination. 221 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR39600(ALL)11/89] When turning, drive slightly beyond the normal turning point so the trailer wheels will clear curbs or other obstructions. *[DR39725(ALL)03/95] When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place the gearshift selector lever in P (PARK) to increase the engine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and air conditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, move the function selector knob to VENT to stop the compressor and increase the engine speed for a short time. *[DR39800(ALL)05/90] RWARNING Do not tow a trailer when using a temporary spare tire. *[DR39900(ALL)05/90] Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels as follows: *[DR40000(ALL)05/95] *[DR40100(ALL)11/89] ❑ Apply the brake pedal and hold. ❑ Have another person place the wheel chocks *[DR40200(ALL)08/95] ❑ With the chocks in place, release the brake [DR40350(ALL)08/95] ❑ Apply the parking brake by pressing the under the trailer wheels. pedal, making sure the chocks are holding. brake pedal down firmly with your right foot while applying the parking brake with your right hand. *[DR40575(ALL)06/95] ❑ Shift the gearshift lever into P (Park). 222 File:10cpdra.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:45:28 1995 *[DR40600(ALL)01/93] *[DR40700(ALL)05/95] *[DR40800(ALL)08/95] *[DR40900(ALL)08/95] To start, after being parked on a grade: *[DR41000(ALL)08/95] ❑ Release the brake pedal and move the vehicle *[DR41100(ALL)05/95] ❑ Apply the brake pedal and hold while [DR41200(ALL)08/95] Luggage Rack (If equipped) [DR41300(ALL)08/95] Always distribute your luggage load evenly. Do not load more than 100 pounds (45 kg) onto rack or cause the vehicle to exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). [DR41400(ALL)08/95] The crossbars and cross slats are adjustable. Loosen the adjustment screws, slide the bars and slats as necessary, and retighten the screws. [DR41500(ALL)08/95] RWARNING ❑ Apply the brake pedal and hold. ❑ Start the engine. ❑ Shift transmission into gear and release the parking brake. uphill to free the wheel chocks. another person retrieves the chocks. Be sure that items on the roof rack are securely fastened. [DR41600(ALL)08/95] Use caution to avoid scratching the paint. Drive carefully and avoid sudden starts and stops. 223 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 Roadside Emergencies % *[RE00400(ALL)03/95] *[RE00500(ALL)08/95] *[RE00600(ALL)02/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or any electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this happens, you may be able to jump-start your vehicle with a booster battery. RWARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. *[RE00700(ALL)02/95] RWARNING To protect yourself when charging a battery, always shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. *[RE00800(ALL)06/95] % RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. *[RE00900(ALL)07/95] % RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. 225 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE00910(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. *[RE00950(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Do not push-start your vehicle. You could damage the catalytic converter. For further information, see Jumper Cables in the Index. *[RE01000(ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing your vehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in the order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service. *[RE01100(ALL)03/95] *[RE01200(ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set). *[RE01300(ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. *[RE01400(ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 226 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE01500(ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the jumper cables. [RE01600(ALL)08/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turn the function selector knob to the V position. Turn off all other switches and gauges. *[RE01700(ALL)05/95] *[RE01800(ALL)03/95] Connecting the jumper cables 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is generally used for the positive terminals and the black for the negative ones. *[RE01900(ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. *[RE02000(ALL)07/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (S) terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged battery. *[RE02100(ALL)03/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a good metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. The following illustration shows where you can find a metallic surface. % *[RE02200(ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (S) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 227 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE02300(ALL)08/95] one third page art:0095070-A Attaching jumper cables *[RE02500(ALL)03/95] *[RE02600(ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way of moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a moderate speed. *[RE02700(ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several attempts, there may be a different problem. *[RE02800(ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few minutes to charge the discharged battery. *[RE02900(ALL)03/95] *[RE03000(ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order. Remove the negative (S) end of the jumper cable from the metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. *[RE03100(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from the booster battery. % 228 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE03200(ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery. *[RE03400(ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the discharged battery. *[RE03500(ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a while with all electrical accessories turned off to let the battery recharge. You may need to use a battery charger to fully recharge the battery. *[RE03550(ALL)03/95] If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter. *[RE03600(ALL)03/95] *[RE03700(ALL)01/95] Changing a Tire % If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers. *[RE03800(ALL)03/95] *[RE03900(ALL)01/95] The Conventional Spare Tire *[RE04000(ALL)03/95] *[RE04100(ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire % % If you have the conventional spare tire, you can use it as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare tire is identical to the other tires that come with your vehicle, although the wheel may not match. You may have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it. 229 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE04200(ALL)01/93] RWARNING If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others. [RE04250(ALL)05/95] RWARNING The tire size on the E-4WD must be maintained. [RE04260(ALL)06/95] Your vehicle may have a full diameter mini spare or a full size tire. This full diameter mini spare is special for the E-4WD and another mini spare from another vehicle can not be substituted without the possibility of damage to your vehicle. All tires should be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended pressures. *[RE04275(ALL)05/95] RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[RE04280(ALL)10/94] Extended use of other than matching size spare tires on a Traction-Lok axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. 230 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE04300(ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT: *[RE04400(ALL)01/95] ❑ exceed 50 *[RE04500(ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than *[RE04600(ALL)01/95] *[RE04700(ALL)01/95] *[RE04800(ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer. ❑ use tire chains on this tire. ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire or *[RE04900(ALL)01/95] *[RE05000(ALL)01/95] ❑ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle. ❑ drive through an automatic car wash with mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances. the maximum vehicle load rating listed on the tire decal. remove it from its wheel. this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught in the rails and it could be damaged. % Spare Tire Location [RE05200(ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is a standard length van model, the spare tire is mounted inside a carrier at the left rear quarter panel. To remove the spare tire, remove the wing nut and plate. A flat tire can be temporarily stowed in the same location. *[RE05100(ALL)03/95] [RE05300(ALL)01/89] quarter page art:0020264-A A side mounted spare tire 231 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE05400(ALL)05/94] If your vehicle is the model with a standard length body or extended length (all models), the temporary spare tire is stowed at the rear of the vehicle under the body. [RE05450(ALL)05/94] The standard length E-4WD model spare tire is mounted on the floor. [RE05500(ALL)08/95] To remove underbody temporary spare tire: [RE05600(ALL)11/89] 1. Insert lug nut wrench into the actuator hole and turn counterclockwise until the cable extends to allow the spare tire to be pulled rearward from under the vehicle. *[RE05700(ALL)10/94] 2. Slide the spare tire to the rear and remove the retainer from the wheel. [RE05800(ALL)11/89] 3. To stow cable/retainer with spare tire removed, insert cable fitting into carrier rear wall slot, place wheel retainer against the carrier, and turn lug nut wrench clockwise until slack is removed. 232 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE05900(ALL)08/95] three fourths page art:0020265-A Temporary spare tire location and assembly 233 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE06000(ALL)08/95] To stow underbody temporary spare tire: [RE06100(ALL)11/89] 1. Insert lug nut wrench into the actuator hole and turn counterclockwise until the cable/retainer is extended for insertion into the wheel. *[RE06200(ALL)10/94] 2. Install the retainer through wheel center with valve stem facing up. [RE06300(ALL)11/89] 3. Rotate wrench clockwise until tire is secured. (Raising mechanism will slip.) *[RE06400(ALL)03/91] 4. Check for proper seating against underbody supports and retighten if necessary. [RE06500(ALL)11/89] half page art:0020266-B Spare tire — underbody carrier 234 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE06600(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not stow any conventional spare tire or flat temporary spare tire in the underbody position. Doing so may cause damage to the tire, rear axle, or brake lines. (Standard length only) [RE06800(ALL)01/89] A flat tire can be temporarily secured to the floor pan under the rear-most seat. To temporarily secure a flat tire: [RE06900(ALL)01/89] 1. Remove the spare tire “J” bolt, plate and wing nut from their stowed location on the jack. [RE07000(ALL)01/89] 2. Position the flat tire, valve stem up, under the rear-most seat and over the “J” bolt attaching bracket on the floor pan. [RE07100(ALL)01/89] 3. Insert the “J” hook bolt through the center of the wheel and hook on bracket. [RE07200(ALL)06/95] 4. Install plate over “J” hook bolt and secure with wing nut. [RE07300(ALL)05/89] quarter page art:0020267-A Stowed position of “J” bolt, plate and wing nut (Standard length model) 235 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE07400(ALL)05/89] one third page art:0020268-A Flat tire stowage (Standard length model) [RE07600(ALL)08/95] half page art:0020270-A Extended van underbody outside spare wheel/flat tire storage 236 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE15100(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Make sure the spare tire and jacking equipment are stowed and secured in the proper storage location. *[RE15200(ALL)03/95] *[RE15250(ALL)12/91] Preparing to Change the Tire *[RE15325(ALL)03/95] 1. *[RE15335(ALL)12/91] NOTE: Make sure the ignition is in the OFF position. *[RE15420(ALL)06/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block the wheel (both directions) that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. *[RE15430(ALL)05/95] RWARNING % NOTE: To lift your vehicle by other than the front or rear jacking points, be sure to use only hoist adapters with a wide contact surface. Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire that you are changing. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. 237 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE15550(ALL)03/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. [RE15600(ALL)05/89] The jack, jack handle and lug nut wrench are stowed separately on the left hand wheelhouse inner panel on standard length models. And in the right rear storage compartment on extended length models. [RE15700(ALL)01/89] one third page art:0020285-A Jack stowage [RE15750(ALL)05/89] half page art:0020269-B Aerostar extended model jack pack 238 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE16800(ALL)12/91] 3. Use the tapered end of the lug nut wrench to unscrew wheel ornaments attached by retaining screws. Remove any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off. *[RE16900(ALL)10/89] 4. Loosen the wheel nuts by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground. [RE17000(ALL)02/95] 5. Unfold the jack handle and lock into the jack. Use the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle. *[RE17100(ALL)05/95] % [RE17300(ALL)06/95] * Removing and Replacing the Tire % [RE17400(ALL)02/89] 1. Positioning the jack a. To raise a front wheel, place the jack under a horizontal portion of the underbody member behind the wheel, as shown. [RE17500(ALL)01/89] one third page art:0020293-A Front jacking point 239 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 b. To raise a rear wheel, place the jack under a horizontal portion of the underbody member ahead of the wheel as shown. [RE17600(ALL)01/89] [RE17700(ALL)01/89] one third page art:0020294-A Rear jacking point c. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. [RE17800(ALL)01/89] [RE17900(ALL)05/91] RWARNING Never place the jack under the rocker panels. *[RE21151(ALL)10/92] one third page art:0020939-B 240 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE21400(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench. *[RE21500(ALL)06/95] *[RE21700(ALL)06/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire. 4. Thread the lug nuts on the wheel studs with the beveled face toward the wheel. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snug against the wheel but do not tighten. *[RE22200(ALL)01/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. *[RE22300(ALL)06/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown in the following illustration. *[RE22400(ALL)12/89] % quarter page art:0020312-B Lug nut tightening sequence *[RE23400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Use of wheels or lug nuts other than original equipment could cause damage to the wheel or mounting system and allow the wheels to come off while the vehicle is in motion. *[RE23500(ALL)07/95] 7. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hub caps that your vehicle has. Make sure that they are screwed or snapped into place. 241 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE23625(ALL)06/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make sure jack is securely fastened so it doesn’t rattle when you drive. The carrier is designed to hold the temporary spare which comes with your vehicle. The stowage of a full size tire in the spare tire carrier may damage the tire or the vehicle. The flat full size tire should be stowed securely in the vehicle until it can be repaired. *[RE23700(ALL)06/95] *[RE23800(ALL)06/93] 9. Unblock the wheels. *[RE24200(ALL)10/89] Also retighten to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) of operation after any wheel change or any time the lug nuts are loosened. Retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation and at intervals specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. *[RE24301(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Failure to retighten wheel lug nuts at mileages specified could allow wheels to come off while the vehicle is in motion. [RE24315(ALL)02/89] eight pica chart:0020313-A 242 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 *[RE24375(ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision *[RE24400(ALL)07/95] *[RE24500(ALL)07/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch *[RE24600(ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index. If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. % Towing Your Vehicle [RE24750(ALL)08/95] The recommended method to tow your Aerostar is with flatbed or wheel lift equipment. However, slingbelt towing is acceptable. On vehicles equipped with an under-vehicle spare tire carrier, remove the tire assembly from the carrier and store it in a secure area before towing. For E-4WD vehicles, the 4-wheel drive system must be disabled prior to towing. The transmission must be in N (Neutral) and the ignition switch must be in the OFF position to disable the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive System. *[RE24700(ALL)05/95] 243 File:12cprea.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:27 1995 [RE24775(ALL)08/95] two third page art:0095060-A 244 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 Customer Assistance % *[HS00205(ALL)06/94] *[HS00210(ALL)08/95] *[HS00215(ALL)06/94] *[HS00220(ALL)06/94] *[HS00225(ALL)06/94] *[HS00230(ALL)06/94] *[HS00235(ALL)06/94] *[HS00240(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators who put you in touch with the help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle. This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages beyond this period (available through Ford Auto Club in the United States or Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Roadside Assistance will cover the following: ❑ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire. ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead. ❑ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out. ❑ Bring you fuel if you run out. ❑ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing and repossession). 245 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS00245(ALL)06/94] *[HS00250(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance *[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00300(ALL)01/95] *[HS00400(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle. % Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada) *[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may, however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able to resolve your concern. *[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at the dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner or general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will have your concern resolved at this level. *[HS00550(ALL)02/95] 246 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS01000(ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership that may be able to help. *[HS01120(ALL)03/95] % one inch art:0060100-E *[HS01130(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS01140(ALL)04/95] % one inch art:0060101-C *[HS01200(ALL)04/95] To process your request, the Ford Customer Assistance Center needs the following information: *[HS01300(ALL)04/95] ❑ your telephone number (both business and *[HS01400(ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the *[HS01500(ALL)03/95] *[HS01550(ALL)03/95] *[HS01600(ALL)03/95] *[HS01700(ALL)03/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle ❑ the date purchased ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle ❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) home) dealership is located (listed on your owner card) 247 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS01800(ALL)05/95] If you have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Center. *[HS02200(ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada. % The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only) *[HS02400(ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independent dispute-settlement program available free to owners or lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. *[HS02500(ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without incurring obligations. *[HS02600(ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review? *[HS02700(ALL)08/95] The Board reviews unresolved warranty performance complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks under warranty that have not been resolved by a dealer or Ford Motor Company. *[HS02750(ALL)03/95] *[HS02800(ALL)01/95] *[HS02900(ALL)01/95] *[HS03100(ALL)01/95] *[HS03200(ALL)01/95] The Board does not review issues involving: *[HS02300(ALL)02/95] ❑ A non-Ford product ❑ A non-Ford dealership ❑ A vehicle sales transaction ❑ A request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless incidental to a service or product complaint being reviewed 248 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS03300(ALL)01/95] *[HS03400(ALL)01/95] *[HS03450(ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty ❑ Alleged liability claims ❑ Property damage where such damage is *[HS03500(ALL)01/95] *[HS03600(ALL)01/95] ❑ Cases currently in litigation ❑ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, *[HS03650(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicable express written new vehicle warranties have expired at receipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochure for California purchasers/lessees. *[HS03700(ALL)04/95] *[HS03800(ALL)04/95] *[HS03900(ALL)04/95] *[HS04000(ALL)04/95] *[HS04200(ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work? *[HS04300(ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right to make an oral presentation before the Board by indicating your choice on the application. Also, oral presentations may be requested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board by simple majority vote. significant when compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty dispute family, or household purposes The Board has four members: ❑ three consumer representatives ❑ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of their business leadership qualities. 249 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS04350(ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to each complaint and, based on the available information, arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the written statements and any oral presentations made by each of the involved parties. *[HS04400(ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases will take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board will make every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it receives the customer application form. *[HS04500(ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you its decision in writing. It will also provide you with a form to indicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but customers may have other options available to them under state or federal law. *[HS04600(ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced into evidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that may be initiated. *[HS04700(ALL)01/95] *[HS04800(ALL)04/95] How Do You Contact the Board? Write to the Board at the following address to request a brochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and a one-page customer application form. The form should be completed and mailed to the same address. *[HS04900(ALL)02/93] one inch art:0060102-B 250 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS05100(ALL)04/95] *[HS05200(ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process? *[HS05300(ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the following information: *[HS05400(ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents and *[HS05500(ALL)08/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicle *[HS05600(ALL)04/95] *[HS05700(ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the time *[HS05800(ALL)04/95] *[HS05900(ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you the *[HS06000(ALL)04/95] ❑ a brief description of your unresolved *[HS06100(ALL)05/95] ❑ a brief summary of actions that were taken *[HS06200(ALL)05/95] ❑ the names *[HS06300(ALL)04/95] ❑ a description of the action you want done to *[HS06305(ALL)07/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanation will be mailed to you. Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the file number assigned to your application and the local Board address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford Motor Company representative are asked to submit statements. maintenance or repair orders that relate to the case identification number (VIN) of repair vehicle or who serviced your vehicle complaint with the dealer and Ford Motor Company (if known) of all people you contacted at the dealership resolve your concern. 251 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS06310(ALL)04/95] Ford of Canada does not have a Dispute Settlement Board. If you have a problem that cannot be resolved by an agreement among you, Ford of Canada, and the Ford dealer, contact the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). In many areas of Canada, CAMVAP will help resolve the problem and, if necessary, will arrange for the matter to be arbitrated. % Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) *[HS06340(ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. *[HS06360(ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. *[HS06380(ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. *[HS06320(ALL)04/95] 252 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 % Ford of Canada Customer Assistance *[HS07850(ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS07700(ALL)05/95] *[HS07950(ALL)03/95] one inch art:0060101-C % Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) *[HS08200(ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between a vehicle owner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). *[HS08300(ALL)08/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s dispute resolution process as outlined under Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada) earlier in this chapter. *[HS08100(ALL)03/95] 253 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS08400(ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the program can obtain an information booklet from your dealer or contact the Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address or telephone number shown below. *[HS08450(ALL)05/95] O & P Services 595 Bay Street — Suite 300 Toronto, Ontario M5G 2C2 Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685 *[HS08500(ALL)04/95] This plan is not available in the province of Quebec. % Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada *[HS08700(ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle. Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you should import your vehicle to that country. *[HS08800(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle needs, contact a district or owner relations office before you leave the U.S. or Canada. *[HS08900(ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is caused by use of improper fuel. *[HS08600(ALL)06/95] 254 File:13cphsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:46:53 1995 *[HS09000(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel. *[HS09100(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write to: *[HS09200(ALL)06/95] one inch art:0095024-A *[HS09300(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office. *[HS09400(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations. 255 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 Accessories *[AC00400(ALL)03/95] *[AC00425(ALL)04/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the following, or products of equivalent quality: *[AC00450(ALL)05/95] twelve pica chart:0001433-A *[AC00500(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available through your local authorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineered specifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brand accessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for complete warranty information and accessory availability. 257 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 [AC00700(ALL)06/95] twenty-four pica chart:0095004-A 258 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 [AC00800(ALL)06/95] ten pica chart:0095005-A *[AC01900(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. *[AC02000(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones, and theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified technician. 259 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 *[AC02100(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. For example, when operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may themselves be damaged or their operation affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers, and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) *[AC02200(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation, design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result if you use this equipment. 260 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 [AC03100(ALL)08/95] thirty-four pica chart:0095079-A 262 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 [AC03200(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095080-A 263 File:14cpaca.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995 [AC03300(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095081-A 264 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 Servicing Your Aerostar % Service Made Easy *[SV00300(ALL)03/95] *[SV00400(ALL)01/95] *[SV00500(ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle. 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be serviced. *[SV00600(ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible. To help you: *[SV00700(ALL)01/95] ❑ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in *[SV00800(ALL)01/95] ❑ When possible, we design parts — such as *[SV00900(ALL)05/94] ❑ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that *[SV01000(ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to check and service regularly. *[SV01050(ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership can provide the parts and service required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are covered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner Guide. the engine compartment so that you can find them easily. the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced without tools. makes tracking routine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. 265 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV01300(ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that you perform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. These services are important for the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly. *[SV01350(ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, and service parts conforming to Ford specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in your vehicle. *[SV01400(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. % *[SV01600(ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle *[SV01700(ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. Here are some general precautions for your safety: *[SV01900(ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running, *[SV02000(ALL)06/95] ❑ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed % avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in moving parts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair. space with the engine running, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. 266 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV02100(ALL)08/95] ❑ Never get under a vehicle while it is *[SV02200(ALL)06/95] ❑ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking *[SV02500(ALL)03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find out how the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter. *[SV02600(ALL)03/95] *[SV02650(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off: 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[SV02700(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engine off. *[SV02725(ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. *[SV02750(ALL)03/95] *[SV02785(ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on: 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[SV02800(ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. *[SV02900(ALL)02/95] supported only by a jack. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands. materials away from the battery and all fuel-related parts. RWARNING Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 267 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV02950(ALL)03/95] *[SV03000(ALL)12/91] % Opening the Hood 1. Pull the hood release handle, located next to the parking brake pedal. [SV03025(ALL)06/95] one third page art:0095045-A Hood release handle *[SV03050(ALL)12/91] 2. While applying downward pressure on the hood, push the hood latch handle located behind the grille near the center front of the vehicle to the left. *[SV03100(ALL)08/94] 3. Disconnect the hood support from the retaining clip on the radiator support and place it into the slot marked PROP in the underside of the hood. [SV03400(ALL)08/95] quarter page art:0020335-A Hood and support rod 268 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV03800(ALL)08/94] To close the hood, raise it so that the support rod comes away from the slotted hole in the hood. Place the support rod in its retaining clip and close the hood with enough force to make it latch. Be sure to oil the hood latch every six months to maintain smooth operation. *[SV03900(ALL)05/90] Always attempt to lift the hood after closing to be sure it is securely latched. *[SV04500(ALL)04/95] *[SV04600(ALL)05/94] Engine Compartment % *[SV05455(ALL)08/95] *[SV05460(ALL)08/95] *[SV05500(ALL)11/94] Your vehicle has one of the following types of engines: ❑ A 3.0 Liter SEFI, V-6 engine or ❑ A 4.0 Liter SEFI, V-6 engine. The following pages show diagrams of each engine type and where to find items that you should regularly service. 269 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV05550(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095038-B 3.0L engine compartment service points 270 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV05575(ALL)05/94] full page art:0020532-I 4.0L engine compartment service points 271 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV05580(ALL)04/95] *[SV05590(ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine *[SV05592(ALL)07/95] ❑ Extreme care must be used if a power washer [SV05594(ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of the % A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than usual. is used to clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions. engine block, do not spray a hot engine with cold water. [SV05596(ALL)06/95] ❑ The alternator and air intake must be covered. Covering these components will help prevent water damage. *[SV05598(ALL)04/95] ❑ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running. Water getting into the engine may cause internal damage. 272 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % *[SV06100(ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank [SV06250(ALL)08/91] quarter page art:0020347-C Fuel filler door % Opening the Fuel Filler Door [SV06610(ALL)03/91] Fuel filler door remote release [SV06620(ALL)03/95] To open the fuel filler door latch, pull on the release lever between the driver’s seat and the door. You cannot open the fuel filler door by pulling on the door itself. *[SV06550(ALL)02/91] [SV06625(ALL)12/91] one third page art:0020353-B Fuel filler door remote release lever [SV06630(ALL)03/95] If the release lever is stuck or damaged and you cannot open the fuel filler door, you must use the override cord located at the back of the left rear wheelhouse. (On extended versions the release lever is located in the stowage box.) 273 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV06640(ALL)08/95] The manual release cord is attached to a T handle marked FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE — MANUAL OVERRIDE. When you pull it, the fuel filler door opens. [SV06651(ALL)08/95] half page art:0095076-A Fuel filler door override handle *[SV06700(ALL)01/95] *[SV06750(ALL)01/95] Removing the fuel cap *[SV06800(ALL)03/90] ❑ Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure on *[SV06850(ALL)08/95] ❑ Turn the fuel cap 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn until a *[SV06900(ALL)03/93] ❑ Make sure that you follow the above fuel cap % The proper instructions for removing the fuel cap are as follows: the plastic lock bar and rotating the fuel cap counterclockwise. hissing sound is heard. When the hissing sound stops, continue rotating counterclockwise to remove the fuel cap. removal instructions and use caution. Such caution will minimize the possibility of fuel spraying during removal of the fuel cap. 274 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV06950(ALL)03/91] To replace and secure the fuel cap; place it in position and rotate it clockwise until it clicks (ratchets). Doing so will not damage or break the fuel cap. The ratcheting mechanism allows the fuel cap to be sealed without overtightening. *[SV06990(ALL)07/95] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraft or equivalent part. *[SV07000(ALL)05/95] % RWARNING If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in the fuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to work improperly in a collision. *[SV07025(ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system. *[SV07050(ALL)05/95] RWARNING If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the cap. *[SV07060(ALL)11/89] A venting fuel tank is not an abnormal condition. It may be caused by: *[SV07061(ALL)07/95] ❑ Too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions. *[SV07062(ALL)11/89] ❑ Pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at high *[SV07063(ALL)11/89] ❑ Extended periods of idling with the engine *[SV07064(ALL)11/89] ❑ Parking vehicle in full sunlight for extended The service stations sometimes sell winter grade fuel in the summer. altitudes. RPM increased above the normal idle range. periods on extremely hot days. 275 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV07500(ALL)06/95] *[SV07600(ALL)06/95] * % *[SV07625(ALL)08/95] [SV08750(ALL)08/95] *[SV08800(ALL)08/95] * % Choosing the Right Fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle. Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law. Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle is damaged because you used the wrong fuel. Vehicle inspection programs may detect misfueling. Under these circumstances, you may be required by law to make costly repairs at your own expense. Octane recommendations Your engine is designed to use regular unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 87. In most cases, it is not necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating higher than 87. At service stations, the octane rating is displayed on a label on the pumps. *[SV08900(ALL)06/95] one inch art:0060001-C Typical octane rating label * [SV09050(ALL)07/95] [SV09200(ALL)08/95] In some parts of the country, “regular” grade fuels are sold with octane ratings of 86 or even less, especially in high altitude areas. We recommend that you do not use these fuels. Always use a fuel with an octane rating of 87, even if it is sold as a “midgrade” or “premium.” Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. However, if a fuel with the recommended octane rating knocks heavily under all driving conditions or knocks lightly driving at cruising speed on level roads, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Persistent, heavy knocking can damage the engine. 276 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV09300(ALL)08/95] *[SV09450(ALL)06/95] Fuel quality *[SV09455(ALL)08/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle more responsive and maintains its good fuel economy and emissions by: *[SV09460(ALL)08/95] ❑ minimizing deposits in fuel injectors, *[SV09465(ALL)08/95] *[SV09470(ALL)08/95] ❑ assuring quick starting and smooth warm-up. ❑ protecting the fuel system from vapor lock in *[SV09475(ALL)08/95] *[SV09480(ALL)08/95] *[SV09485(ALL)08/95] ❑ protecting your fuel system from rusting. ❑ preventing the fuel lines from freezing. ❑ preventing the fuel system from “gumming *[SV09500(ALL)06/95] It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel. *[SV09600(ALL)04/95] *[SV09900(ALL)06/95] Gasolines for clean air % % If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation problems when the engine is cold, it may be caused by fuel with low volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. combustion chambers and on intake valves. very hot weather, which causes the engine to hesitate or stall and makes restarts difficult. up” when your vehicle is not used for long periods of time. Fuels in certain areas of the country are required to contain oxygenates to improve air quality. Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol (blended at no more than 10%), methanol or wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with cosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyl tertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than 15%). 277 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV09950(ALL)08/95] Reformulated fuel is also required in certain areas of the U.S. These fuels are designed to further reduce the emissions from your vehicle. *[SV10000(ALL)06/95] Generally, you should not experience difficulties operating your vehicle on fuels containing oxygenates. We encourage you to use these fuels. *[SV10185(ALL)06/95] % Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels *[SV10195(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. [SV10198(ALL)08/95] *[SV10202(ALL)07/95] *[SV10206(ALL)07/95] *[SV10208(ALL)07/95] ❑ Turn vehicle off when refueling. ❑ Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels are extremely flammable. ❑ Do not siphon any fuel by mouth. RWARNING Gasoline or gasoline blended with methanol can cause blindness and possible death when swallowed. If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison control center immediately. *[SV10209(ALL)07/95] *[SV10211(ALL)07/95] ❑ Avoid breathing vapors while refueling. ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with *[SV10213(ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact *[SV10215(ALL)07/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory animals. soap and water. lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes, and seek medical attention. 278 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV10230(ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result. Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adverse reaction. *[SV10300(ALL)02/95] *[SV10400(ALL)04/94] Filling the fuel tank RWARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. *[SV10500(ALL)01/95] *[SV10550(ALL)01/95] To fill the fuel tank properly: *[SV10600(ALL)01/95] 1. Remove the fuel cap by following the instructions above under Removing the Fuel Cap in this chapter. Proceed to add fuel to the tank only if your vehicle is on level ground. *[SV10700(ALL)05/95] 2. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel and put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel filler pipe. *[SV10800(ALL)08/95] 3. If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you do not wash it off. *[SV10900(ALL)08/95] 4. Replace the fuel cap completely when you are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until it is fully tight. It will click when it is fully tightened. NOTE: Extinguish all lit cigarettes, other smoking materials, and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. 279 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV11000(ALL)01/95] You may occasionally hear and/or feel a slight thump occurring one or two seconds after a gentle stop. This is normal and generally occurs with the fuel tank 3/4 full. It is caused by the wave action of the fuel within the tank. *[SV11300(ALL)05/95] *[SV11400(ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel *[SV11450(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on modern powertrain components. *[SV11500(ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine. *[SV11600(ALL)05/95] *[SV11700(ALL)07/95] Fuel Economy *[SV11800(ALL)05/95] *[SV11900(ALL)06/95] To calculate fuel economy: 1. Fill the tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. *[SV12000(ALL)06/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons or liters) purchased. [SV12200(ALL)08/95] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the fuel tank and record the final odometer reading. % % If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on level ground away from traffic. Add at least two gallons (8 liters) of fuel to start your vehicle again. If your vehicle is not on level ground, you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters) of fuel to start it. Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicle and can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers (L/100K). Do not calculate the fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle will normally use. 280 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV12225(ALL)08/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel economy: *[SV12250(ALL)08/95] ❑ English: MPG = (total miles driven) v [SV12275(ALL)08/95] ❑ Metric: L/100k = (100 x liters used) v (total (gallons used) kilometers driven) % Comparisons With Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and Transport Canada (TC) Fuel Economy Estimates *[SV12400(ALL)08/95] EPA and TC fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests under simulated road conditions and thus are estimates which may not reflect the actual conditions you experience or your personal style of driving. The EPA or TC fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve the fuel economy shown. *[SV12675(ALL)05/95] *[SV12720(ALL)08/95] *[SV12740(ALL)05/95] *[SV12760(ALL)03/95] *[SV12780(ALL)05/95] *[SV12820(ALL)05/95] *[SV12840(ALL)05/95] *[SV12860(ALL)05/95] *[SV12880(ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy: *[SV12920(ALL)05/95] *[SV12940(ALL)05/95] *[SV12960(ALL)05/95] ❑ Underinflated tires ❑ Heavy loads ❑ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or *[SV12300(ALL)08/95] ❑ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance ❑ Excessive speed ❑ Rapid acceleration ❑ Driving with your foot on the brake ❑ Sudden stops ❑ Extended engine idling ❑ Using speed control in hilly terrain ❑ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster and other accessories luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc. 281 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % *[SV13600(ALL)02/95] *[SV13610(ALL)03/95] Engine Oil Recommendations We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification ESE-M2C153-E and displaying the American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container. *[SV13650(ALL)03/95] one third page art:0060021-E The API Certification Mark *[SV13670(ALL)01/95] *[SV13680(ALL)01/95] *[SV13690(ALL)04/95] % [SV13700(ALL)01/95] * Never use: ❑ “Non-Detergent” oils ❑ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG ❑ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments *[SV13710(ALL)06/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F (-25˚C). *[SV13750(ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be changed according to the maintenance schedule. % % 282 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV13775(ALL)01/95] *[SV13800(ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil *[SV13900(ALL)03/95] *[SV14000(ALL)02/95] Checking the engine oil level: 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan. *[SV14050(ALL)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[SV14100(ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. *[SV14200(ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and carefully pull it out of the engine. *[SV14300(ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making sure it is fully seated. % % Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level ground. [SV14400(ALL)06/95] quarter page art:0095016-A Engine oil dipstick 283 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV14500(ALL)03/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage or high oil consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from the engine. *[SV14600(ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated. *[SV14700(ALL)03/95] *[SV14800(ALL)01/95] Adding engine oil *[SV15000(ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil. *[SV17300(ALL)03/95] % [SV17400(ALL)03/95] * *[SV17500(ALL)02/95] Engine Coolant % % *[SV17700(ALL)08/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil. Checking the Engine Coolant NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter. Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the engine from overheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter. Check the level of the engine coolant at least once a month, but preferably each time you stop for fuel. Simply look at the engine coolant recovery reservoir located in the engine compartment. To locate this reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’s engine under Engine Compartment in this chapter. 284 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV17740(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine is running or hot. *[SV17750(ALL)03/95] If the engine coolant has not been checked for a long period of time the engine coolant reservoir may eventually empty. If the engine coolant reservoir empties, check the engine coolant level in the radiator. Read the following warnings before removing the radiator cap. If it is necessary to fill the radiator, refer to the Engine Coolant Refill Procedure in this chapter for instructions. [SV17765(ALL)08/95] 1. Before you remove the radiator cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful when you remove the radiator cap. [SV17770(ALL)05/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop. [SV17775(ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases. [SV17780(ALL)03/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn and remove cap. [SV17785(ALL)03/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot steam may blow out or hot engine coolant may even splash out. 285 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV17950(ALL)08/95] Adding Engine Coolant [SV18000(ALL)08/95] quarter page art:0020354-A Adding engine coolant to reservoir [SV20075()08/95] RWARNING Be careful not to add engine coolant to the windshield washer fluid reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. [SV20100()08/95] When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and water to the engine coolant recovery reservoir - DO NOT ADD DIRECTLY TO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water only in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50 mixture of coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. [SV20125()08/95] Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough of a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquid level to the fill line on the reservoir. [SV20150()08/95] RWARNING Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine is running or hot. 286 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV20175()08/95] If you must remove the coolant recovery cap, follow these steps to avoid personal injury casued by escaping steam or engine coolant: [SV20200()08/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. [SV20225()08/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap and turn it slowly, counterclockwise to the first stop. [SV20250()08/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases. [SV20275()08/95] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to press the cap down, turn it counterclockwise, and remove it. [SV20295()08/95] Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or an equivalent premium engine coolant that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. Ford Premium Engine Coolant is an optimized formula that will protect all metals and rubber elastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). [SV20300()08/95] Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Do not use supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additives may harm your engine cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine cooling system. [SV20325()08/95] Recycled engine coolant [SV20350()08/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled engine coolant produced by Ford-approved processes. Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A, and use of such coolant may harm engine and cooling system components. 287 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV20375()08/95] Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. [SV20400()08/95] Coolant refill capacity [SV20425()08/95] To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index. [SV20450()08/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if you have to add more than a quart (liter) of engine coolant per month. [SV20475()08/95] Severe winter climate [SV20490()08/95] If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than -34˚F [-36˚C]), it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle is such that the coolant will not freeze at the temperature level in which you drive during winter months. Never increase the engine coolant concentration above 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and water in your vehicle year-round in non-extreme climates. *[SV20500(ALL)08/95] *[SV20600(ALL)10/89] Checking Hoses % Inspect all engine and heater system hoses for deterioration, leaks and loose clamps before adding or replacing engine coolant. Make whatever repairs or replacements that are necessary using Motorcraft parts or their equivalents. 288 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV20700(ALL)08/95] *[SV20800(ALL)10/89] *[SV20900(ALL)03/94] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush 1. Turn off the engine and let it cool. Fully depressurize the engine cooling system by covering the radiator cap with a thick cloth and turning it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop. Step back while the pressure releases. *[SV20950(ALL)05/90] *[SV21000(ALL)05/90] 2. Remove the cap. 3. Attach a small hose to the drain tube at the bottom of the radiator. *[SV21200(ALL)05/90] 4. Let the engine coolant drain into a suitable container. Disconnect the lower radiator hose at the radiator connector and drain any remaining engine coolant into a container. *[SV21225(ALL)05/94] 5. Reconnect the lower radiator hose and close the radiator drain cock. *[SV21250(ALL)05/95] Proper procedures for flushing the cooling system can be found in the Service Manual. *[SV21300(ALL)08/95] *[SV21400(ALL)10/89] Engine coolant refill procedure *[SV21500(ALL)01/89] 1. Fill the radiator with a 50/50 mixture of the specified engine coolant concentrate and water. Allow several minutes for trapped air to escape (bubble out) and for engine coolant to flow through the radiator. *[SV21900(ALL)03/94] 2. Replace the radiator cap to its fully installed position, then back off to the first stop. This will prevent high pressure from building up in the cooling system during this part of the fill procedure. % % To drain your vehicle’s engine coolant: After you have drained the engine cooling system: 289 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV22000(ALL)03/91] 3. Turn the heater (temperature and mode selection) knobs to maximum heat positions and operate the engine at fast idle (approximately 2000 RPM) for three to four minutes. *[SV22200(ALL)05/95] 4. Shut off the engine and allow the engine to cool. Cover the radiator cap with a thick cloth and cautiously remove it. Step back while the pressure releases. [SV22300(ALL)05/89] 5. Add the engine coolant mixture to a level approximately 1 to 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) below the filler neck seat. [SV22400(ALL)05/89] 6. Reinstall the radiator cap fully and back off to the first stop. Once again, turn the engine at fast idle until the upper radiator hose is warm and the thermostat is open. [SV22550(ALL)05/89] 7. Finally, check the radiator and add more engine coolant if needed, following the procedures noted above. Reinstall the radiator cap securely, when finished. [SV22555(ALL)05/95] 8. If more engine coolant is necessary, remove the small plug from the top of the engine coolant recovery reservoir (not the large cap of the windshield washer reservoir) and add 1.1 quarts (1 liter) of the 50/50 engine coolant mixture. Replace the plug in its original position. *[SV22565(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Due to air being trapped in the 4.0L engine cooling system, it is not unusual to experience a 4 to 7 ounce (120 to 210 ml) coolant loss up to 7,500 miles (12,000 km) after initial system fill. 290 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV22620(ALL)06/95] In order to bleed the cooling system properly after initial fill with coolant, it might need up to five cycles of: *[SV22630(ALL)06/95] *[SV22640(ALL)06/95] ❑ heating up the system (thermostat open) ❑ making sure coolant is at least up to the *[SV22650(ALL)06/95] ❑ letting the coolant cool down (engine *[SV22660(ALL)06/95] ❑ topping off the coolant overflow bottle to *[SV22680(ALL)06/95] If coolant loss continues after 7,500 miles (12,000 km), consult your Ford Dealer. cold fill mark of overflow bottle coolant temperature gauge below the N of NORMAL) the cold fill mark % Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers *[SV22800(ALL)03/95] *[SV22900(ALL)01/95] Washer Fluid *[SV22700(ALL)03/95] % *[SV23300(ALL)05/95] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time you stop for fuel. The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid is located in the engine compartment. RWARNING Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container for the engine coolant. [SV23400(ALL)01/89] quarter page art:0020358-A Windshield washer reservoir 291 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades, and windshield washer system. *[SV23900(ALL)10/89] If you choose to use a windshield washing solution that must be mixed, follow the manufacturer’s mixing instructions. Improperly mixed solutions may freeze unexpectedly. *[SV24300(ALL)03/90] Checking/adding the washer fluid for the liftgate [SV24400(ALL)03/95] Check the liftgate washer reservoir regularly. This is not the same reservoir your front windshield wipers use. The opening for this reservoir is on the right side of the liftgate above the tail lamp. A fill cup is located on top of the right hand tail lamp and is accessible when the liftgate is open. Close the fill cup cover after filling and before closing the liftgate. Refill this reservoir with the same solution you use for your windshield. To find out how much washer fluid the liftgate reservoir holds, see Refill capacities in the Index. *[SV23850(ALL)01/95] 292 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV24450(ALL)12/91] one third page art:0020362-B Liftgate window washer reservoir *[SV24500(ALL)03/95] *[SV24600(ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades *[SV24700(ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will damage your blades. *[SV24800(ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF position. Do not move the wipers manually. Manually moving the wipers across the windshield may damage them. % Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also check them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. 293 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV24900(ALL)03/01] *[SV25000(ALL)07/95] Wiper blade replacement *[SV25200(ALL)03/95] *[SV25300(ALL)03/95] Tires % If the wiper blades still do not work properly after you clean them, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade element. When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the instructions that come with them. Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them. Always follow these precautions: *[SV25400(ALL)03/95] ❑ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended *[SV25500(ALL)02/95] ❑ Stay within the recommended load limits (see *[SV25600(ALL)02/95] ❑ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly *[SV25700(ALL)10/89] ❑ Drive at safe speeds. ❑ Make sure the spare tire is mounted and [SV25750(ALL)08/95] pressures. Load limits in the Index). distributed. anchored properly in the tire carrier without contacting functional parts such as brake tubes, fuel lines, exhaust pipes, etc. *[SV25800(ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or go flat. *[SV25890(ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. 294 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV25900(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. *[SV26100(ALL)05/95] % *[SV26150(ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find proper cold pressure and load limits of recommended size tires on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. RWARNING Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. *[SV26200(ALL)08/95] *[SV26300(ALL)02/95] Tire Inspection and Maintenance *[SV26400(ALL)10/89] Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If you suspect internal damage to the tire, have it demounted and checked. You may need to repair or replace it. % Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air to leak from the tire, and make the necessary repairs. 295 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV26410(ALL)07/95] *[SV26420(ALL)11/89] Wheel Inspection and Maintenance *[SV26430(ALL)06/93] Front wheel bearings require periodic repacking and adjustment as specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. Loose or worn front wheel bearings tend to let the vehicle wander or shimmy, and can eventually cause excessive tire wear. *[SV26435(ALL)06/95] Whenever a wheel is removed and then re-installed, always remove any corrosion that may be present on the mounting surface of the wheel and/or the surface of the hub, drum or rotor that contacts the wheel. Check for damage that would affect the runout of the wheels. Wobble or shimmy will eventually damage the wheel bearings. *[SV26440(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Installing wheels without good metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surface can cause the wheel lug nuts to loosen and could allow the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion. [SV26447(ALL)05/95] RWARNING On-vehicle wheel balancing will cause damage to the drivetrain of E-4WD Aerostars. 296 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV26450(ALL)03/95] *[SV26460(ALL)03/95] % Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped) This axle provides added drive away traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surface with poor traction. *[SV26470(ALL)05/95] RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[SV26500(ALL)02/95] *[SV26600(ALL)03/95] Tire Rotation *[SV26700(ALL)07/92] Rotate the tires according to the following diagram. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. If your light truck has a temporary spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation pattern. *[SV26750(ALL)03/90] In situations where the tires differ from front to rear (snow/traction), simply rotate using a side to side pattern. % Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them at the mileage shown in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet which came with your vehicle. 297 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV26800(ALL)06/93] half page art:0020364-A Tire rotation pattern *[SV26900(ALL)10/89] After each rotation, adjust individual tire pressure as specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Tighten wheel lug nuts to the required torque specification and retighten again after 500 miles (800 km). *[SV27000(ALL)08/95] If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you may demount the full size, non-temporary spare tire (if so equipped) and remount on an aluminum wheel to rotate the spare tire into your vehicle’s rotation pattern. Rebalance the wheel. *[SV27100(ALL)03/95] You may discover uneven outside shoulder wear on your vehicle’s front radial tires if you drive often in the city and turn frequently around curbs. You can extend the life of your front tires by remounting them so the outside of the tire faces inside on the wheel rim. 298 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV27300(ALL)04/95] *[SV27400(ALL)05/95] % Replacing the Tires Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left. *[SV27500(ALL)10/89] quarter page art:0060006-A Wear band *[SV27600(ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may need to replace them before a wear band appears across the entire tread. Some spots wear more heavily than others. *[SV27700(ALL)03/90] Your wheels and tires are match-mounted for improved ride. Before you begin to repair a tire, mark the wheel and tire so that they are properly aligned when remounted. This will ensure that the tires will continue to give you the same ride level. *[SV27851(ALL)01/95] RWARNING When replacing full size tires, never mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the decal. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. 299 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV27860(ALL)03/90] RWARNING Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, load-carrying capacity, and tread design (e.g. “All Terrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. *[SV27885(ALL)06/95] RWARNING Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires. *[SV27895(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle and make it easier to lose control and roll over. *[SV27900(ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. 300 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV28100(ALL)03/90] three fourths page art:0020366-E Tire identification chart *[SV28700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies may damage your vehicle or cause accidents resulting in serious injuries. 301 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV28800(ALL)04/95] *[SV28950(ALL)03/95] Wheel and Tire Matching *[SV31100(ALL)04/95] *[SV31200(ALL)01/95] Snow Tires and Chains % % See an authorized tire dealer for proper servicing procedures. Wheels and tires must be properly removed, matched and remounted to maintain the best possible ride. The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that provide traction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionally chains for your tires. *[SV31300(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. *[SV31400(ALL)02/95] Do not use chains when using a temporary spare. For full size tires, use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them where you live. When you use the tire chains: *[SV31500(ALL)01/95] ❑ Make sure the chains are the right size for *[SV31550(ALL)08/93] ❑ Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminum *[SV31575(ALL)11/94] ❑ Local regulations may prohibit or restrict the your tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. wheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRE CHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEEL WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheel covers (if equipped) from steel rims before using tire chains to avoid scratches or damage. use of tire chains. Investigate the laws and regulations in your area before installing chains. 302 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV31625(ALL)03/95] ❑ Put the chains on tightly with the ends held down securely. Verify that no chain touches any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2 mile (0.8 km). Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. *[SV31650(ALL)07/94] ❑ Do not drive faster than 30 *[SV31750(ALL)11/94] ❑ Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive *[SV31800(ALL)10/94] *[SV31900(ALL)05/94] ❑ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible. ❑ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity *[SV31950(ALL)05/91] ❑ Make sure your suspension insulation and *[SV31960(ALL)04/95] *[SV31965(ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Wheels *[SV31967(ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are abrasive. % mph (48 km/h) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower. Avoid bumps, holes and sharp turns. If you can hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. carefully and avoid hard braking. after using them on snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads. bumpers are not missing or worn to avoid damage to your vehicle. Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to remove grease and tar. 303 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV31968(ALL)03/95] If you have whitewall tires that are difficult to clean with regular detergent, use Ford Extra Strength Whitewall Tire Cleaner or equivalent. Follow the directions on the container and rinse the tires with plenty of clean water. *[SV32100(ALL)03/95] *[SV32200(ALL)02/95] Battery % Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery. The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does not require additional water during its life of service. The vents are part of the cover and cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the battery terminals. *[SV32300(ALL)02/95] If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals, remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are done cleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the top of each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion. *[SV32400(ALL)07/95] *[SV32500(ALL)02/95] Battery replacement *[SV32600(ALL)07/95] Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at least every 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km), in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte in each cell up to the “level” indicator. Do not overfill the battery cell. If your original equipment battery requires replacement (under warranty), it may in some cases be replaced by a Motorcraft low-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery has removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for adding water, if needed. 304 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV32700(ALL)02/95] If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you don’t use hard water, or water with a high mineral or alkali content. If possible, however, try to only fill the battery cell with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. *[SV32725(ALL)03/95] *[SV32750(ALL)04/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment % Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acid batteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility for disposal. *[SV32775(ALL)03/95] one inch art:0000983-A Battery recycling symbol % Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery, install a new battery, or experience a dead battery you must allow the computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To let the engine do this, put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Let the engine idle for at least one minute. *[SV33000(ALL)03/95] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle is relearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while you drive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previous procedure. *[SV32900(ALL)05/95] 305 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV33200(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lit tobacco to come near the battery. When charging or working near a battery, always cover your face and protect your eyes, and also provide ventilation. *[SV33300(ALL)07/95] % RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. *[SV33310(ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. *[SV33400(ALL)06/95] % RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. *[SV33500(ALL)01/95] *[SV33601(ALL)06/95] % Automatic Transmission Fluid Under normal driving conditions automatic transmission fluid should be changed every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 21,000 miles (34,000 km) if under severe duty conditions. However, if the transmission is not working properly, for instance, the transmission may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked. 306 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV33701(ALL)05/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature, after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving. However, if necessary, you can check the fluid level without having to drive 20 miles to obtain a normal operating temperature if outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C). *[SV33801(ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds or in city traffic during hot weather, or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking. % Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid *[SV33910(ALL)06/95] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the engine and move the transmission shift selector through all of the gear ranges allowing sufficient time for each position to engage. Securely latch the transmission shift selector in the P (Park) position, fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running. *[SV33930(ALL)10/89] RWARNING *[SV33901(ALL)02/95] Your vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the dipstick and outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C). *[SV33940(ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap (located toward the passenger’s side of the engine), pull the dipstick out and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level. 307 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV33950(ALL)03/90] When checking fluid at normal operating temperature, the fluid level should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick. When the vehicle has not been driven, and outside temperature is above 50˚F (10˚C), the fluid level should be between the holes on the dipstick. *[SV33960(ALL)08/95] *[SV33970(ALL)03/94] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid *[SV33980(ALL)10/89] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tube to bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. % *[SV33990(ALL)04/95] % The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used. NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. *[SV34000(ALL)06/92] quarter page art:0020372-E Automatic transmission dipstick 308 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV35800(ALL)07/95] Driveline Universal Joint and Slip Yoke *[SV36000(ALL)06/93] The universal joints that come standard with your vehicle do not require lubrication. If your original equipment universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will be necessary at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. *[SV36300(ALL)03/95] *[SV36350(ALL)05/90] Brake Fluid % Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid level indicator in the master cylinder which lights the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel when the brake fluid level is low. *[SV36400(ALL)03/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and the brake pads wear. *[SV36500(ALL)08/95] Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You can do this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic brake fluid reservoir on the master cylinder. The fluid level should be at or near the MAX mark. *[SV36550(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Brake fluid is toxic. *[SV36560(ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. 309 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the filler cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA or DOT 3 equivalent fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. *[SV36850(ALL)12/91] NOTE: If brake fluid is spilled on painted surfaces, it must be flushed and wiped away immediately. Brake fluid may dissolve the paint finish on your vehicle. *[SV36900(ALL)01/95] RWARNING *[SV36600(ALL)02/95] If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. *[SV37000(ALL)01/95] *[SV37100(ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line. If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below the seam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have the brake system inspected. *[SV37200(ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. [SV37300(ALL)08/95] quarter page art:0095017-A Brake master cylinder reservoir 310 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % *[SV37600(ALL)03/95] *[SV37700(ALL)01/95] Power Steering Fluid Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall). % Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid *[SV37900(ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range. *[SV38000(ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back and forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is installed at this time. *[SV38100(ALL)05/95] % [SV38200(ALL)03/94] * 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The fluid level should be between the arrows in the FULL HOT range, which is marked on the side of the dipstick, opposite the side marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the level is within the FULL HOT range. *[SV37800(ALL)03/95] 311 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV38250(ALL)03/94] one third page art:0021016-B Power steering dipstick [SV38525(ALL)05/94] one third page art:0095061-A Power steering reservoir [SV38550(ALL)05/94] one third page art:0020531-B Power steering reservoir 312 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV38800(ALL)07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach the FULL HOT range. Do not overfill. *[SV38850(ALL)03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and make sure that it fits snugly. [SV38900(ALL)06/95] Use only a power steering fluid such as Ford Power Steering Fluid Motorcraft MERCONH ATF. *[SV39200(ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the power steering pump. *[SV39400(ALL)02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it is cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL COLD range on the dipstick. The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature is approximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C). *[SV39405(ALL)06/93] NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel of your vehicle with the engine off. It could force power steering fluid out from the reservoir cap or in extreme cases, it could unseat the cap. *[SV39500(ALL)03/95] *[SV39600(ALL)12/91] Fuses % *[SV39700(ALL)10/89] Fuses and circuit breakers protect your vehicle’s electrical system from overloading. If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the system may have been overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped a circuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses or circuit breakers. The following charts tell you which fuses or circuit breakers protect each electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or a circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts of your vehicle that use that circuit will not work. 313 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV39900(ALL)06/95] thirty-six pica chart:0020388-L 314 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV40000(ALL)08/95] fourteen pica chart:0095064-A 315 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV40050(ALL)06/95] full page art:0020516-I Fuses and their location (under instrument panel on driver’s side) 316 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV40060(ALL)08/95] thirty-two pica chart:0095066-A 317 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV40070(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095067-A 318 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV40080(ALL)08/95] ten pica chart:0095068-A 319 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV40600(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095065-A 320 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV40700(ALL)05/95] To remove and replace a fuse, use the fuse puller provided. [SV43500(ALL)06/95] quarter page art:0030248-B The side view of a fuse *[SV43700(ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. [SV43810(ALL)10/90] Access to the trailer tow fuse is through the rear most storage compartment in the side trim panel. This is on the left for all Aerostar models. [SV43820(ALL)03/95] 1. Remove the screws located inside the compartment and take off the access hole cover. [SV43830(ALL)03/95] 2. Reach in through access hole to remove fuses. The fuses are located on the side of the bracket assembly. [SV43840(ALL)03/95] 3. Replace fuses with standard push-in fuses (plug type). [SV43850(ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall compartment back and screw into place. *[SV44000(ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you do not find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have your electrical system checked. 321 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % Circuit Breakers [SV44200(ALL)08/95] If you need to check a circuit breaker, locate the fuse panel first. Otherwise, locate the circuit breaker according to the instructions on the charts given earlier in this chapter. *[SV44400(ALL)10/92] However, you should know that the circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow the electrical parts to work again once the overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit breakers continue to cut off electricity, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked. *[SV44450(ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuit breakers. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. [SV44500(ALL)08/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the same amperage rating. To remove a circuit breaker, grip it with your finger and thumb and pull it straight out of its socket. *[SV44600(ALL)03/95] *[SV44700(ALL)01/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement *[SV44100(ALL)03/95] % *[SV44800(ALL)01/95] *[SV44850(ALL)02/95] *[SV44900(ALL)01/95] *[SV45000(ALL)01/95] *[SV45100(ALL)01/95] *[SV45200(ALL)01/95] *[SV45300(ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights frequently: ❑ headlamps ❑ high-mount brakelamp ❑ tail lamps ❑ brakelamps ❑ hazard flasher ❑ turn signals ❑ license plate lamp 322 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if: *[SV45500(ALL)01/95] ❑ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to *[SV45600(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give you *[SV45700(ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantially *[SV45800(ALL)03/95] *[SV45900(ALL)01/95] Headlamp Bulb *[SV45400(ALL)01/95] % *[SV46000(ALL)05/95] turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams on enough light to see clearly at night away from a position slightly down and to the right The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the whole lamp. RWARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. *[SV46050(ALL)12/91] NOTE: If the bulb is accidently touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used. *[SV46100(ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediately replace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housing and affect its performance. 323 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV46300(ALL)03/95] *[SV46400(ALL)01/95] Removing the headlamp bulb 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch on the instrument panel is in the OFF position. [SV46675(ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the screws that attach the headlamp trim to the vehicle. [SV46750(ALL)03/91] 3. Remove the headlamp trim. [SV46820(ALL)03/91] 4. Remove the four screws (two on top and two on bottom) that attach the headlamp to the vehicle. [SV46830(ALL)03/91] quarter page art:0020850-A [SV46840(ALL)03/91] NOTE: Do not disturb the aim adjusting screws. [SV46860(ALL)03/91] 5. Pull the headlamp away from the vehicle and remove the electrical connector by pulling rearward. [SV46880(ALL)08/95] 6. Unsnap the bulb retaining wire and carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket by gently pulling it out without turning it. 324 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV46890(ALL)03/91] half page art:0020851-A *[SV46900(ALL)03/95] *[SV47000(ALL)02/95] Installing the headlamp bulb 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until the plastic base contacts the rear of the socket. [SV47150(ALL)03/91] 2. Snap the retaining wire over both sides of the bulb and connect the electrical connector. [SV47275(ALL)03/91] 3. Position the headlamp on the vehicle and install the four attaching screws. *[SV47300(ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. 325 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV47310(ALL)08/95] Removing the High-Mount Brakelamp Bulb [SV47315(ALL)05/94] Liftgate models [SV47317(ALL)08/95] To remove the brakelamp and bulb: *[SV47330(ALL)03/93] 1. Remove the two screws from the surface of the lens. *[SV47340(ALL)03/93] 2. After removing the screws, remove the lamp assembly. [SV47353(ALL)07/93] 3. Disconnect the high-mount brakelamp wiring connector. [SV47356(ALL)03/93] 4. Remove the screw retaining the bulb holder assembly, pull the bulb holder assembly away from the lamp, and pull the bulb straight out of the holder. *[SV47360(ALL)03/95] To replace/install the brakelamp: [SV47367(ALL)03/93] 1. Push bulb(s) into bulb holder assembly. [SV47373(ALL)03/93] 2. Place bulb holder assembly on lamp and install retaining screw. Tighten screw. [SV47376(ALL)07/93] 3. Connect the high-mount brakelamp wiring connector. [SV47377(ALL)03/93] 4. Position the lamp assembly on the vehicle. [SV47378(ALL)03/93] 5. Install and tighten the two screws. [SV47380(ALL)08/95] 6. Apply brakes to confirm the brakelamp is functional after installing. 326 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV47381(ALL)06/95] half page art:0095018-A Replacing the high-mount brakelamp bulb — liftgate models only [SV47383(ALL)05/94] Dual Rear Door Models *[SV47384(ALL)03/95] *[SV47385(ALL)03/93] To remove the brakelamp: 1. Remove the two screws from the surface of the lens. [SV47386(ALL)03/93] 2. Pull the lens assembly out of the lamp housing. [SV47387(ALL)03/93] 3. Pull the bulb socket out of the lens assembly. It is not necessary to twist the socket. [SV47388(ALL)03/93] 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 327 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV47389(ALL)03/95] To replace/install the brakelamp: [SV47396(ALL)03/93] 1. Push the bulb into the socket. [SV47397(ALL)03/93] 2. Push the socket into the lens assembly. [SV47398(ALL)03/93] 3. Install the lens assembly into lamp. [SV47399(ALL)03/93] 4. Install and tighten the two screws. [SV47400(ALL)08/95] half page art:0021006-A Replacing the high-mount brakelamp bulb — dual rear door models only 328 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV47625(ALL)03/95] Bulb Specifications [SV47650(ALL)06/95] thirty pica chart:0095029-A 329 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV47675(ALL)06/95] thirty-four pica chart:0095030-A 330 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 % *[SV48600(ALL)03/95] *[SV48700(ALL)05/95] Emission Control System Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter which enables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission requirements. *[SV48800(ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emission control parts continue to work properly: *[SV48900(ALL)01/95] *[SV49000(ALL)01/95] *[SV49100(ALL)01/95] ❑ Use only unleaded fuel. ❑ Avoid running out of fuel. ❑ Do not turn off the ignition while your *[SV49200(ALL)03/95] ❑ Have the services listed in your Maintenance *[SV49300(ALL)05/95] vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. Schedule and Record booklet performed according to the specified schedule. RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. *[SV49400(ALL)05/95] RWARNING On vehicles without original equipment floor covering or insulation, do not let passengers ride in your truck in a manner that allows contact between skin and the metal floor. *[SV49500(ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the check engine light, or the temperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that the emission system is not working properly. 331 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV49600(ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine or exhaust system. *[SV49700(ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. In some of the United States and in Canada, vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device is removed or is prevented from working. *[SV49800(ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service your vehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform. *[SV49900(ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires. *[SV50000(ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune-up specifications. % *[SV50010(ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing *[SV50020(ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway % 332 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 driving to complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all of the OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBD II system is set to the ready condition. The amount of driving required to reach the ready condition varies with individual driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimum amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do the additional driving required by law, a service center can perform this drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work. *[SV50030(ALL)07/95] *[SV50040(ALL)06/95] OBD II Drive Cycle *[SV50050(ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. [SV50055(ALL)08/95] NOTE: When instructions read “in drive,” use the standard Overdrive gear. It is not necessary to turn Overdrive off with the OVERDRIVE OFF button. For more information on Overdrive, refer to the Automatic Overdrive Transmission section of the Driving Your Aerostar chapter. The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature before proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive Cycle. *[SV50060(ALL)07/95] The following steps must be run in the order shown. If any steps are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. *[SV50070(ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4 minutes. *[SV50080(ALL)06/95] *[SV50090(ALL)07/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds. 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds. 333 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV50100(ALL)07/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph (70 km/h) for 30 seconds. *[SV50110(ALL)06/95] *[SV50120(ALL)07/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds. 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speeds between 25 and 40 mph (40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15 minute drive cycle the following modes must be achieved: *[SV50130(ALL)07/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each *[SV50140(ALL)07/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and *[SV50150(ALL)07/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady state throttle drives. *[SV50160(ALL)07/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph (70-100 km/h). This should take approximately 5 minutes. *[SV50170(ALL)07/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph (70-100 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes. *[SV50180(ALL)07/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45 and 60 mph (70-100 km/h). *[SV50190(ALL)07/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drive for 40 seconds. *[SV50200(ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can be turned off when convenient. 334 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV51500(ALL)07/95] *[SV51600(ALL)07/95] % Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant Specifications Refill Capacities [SV51700(ALL)08/95] 26 pica chart:0095044-B 335 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV51750(ALL)08/95] twenty pica chart:0095001-B 336 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV52800(ALL)05/95] % Motorcraft Parts [SV52900(ALL)08/95] eighteen pica chart:0095002-A 337 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV53500(ALL)05/95] % Lubricant Specifications [SV53600(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095043-B 338 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV53650(ALL)08/95] twelve pica chart:0095058-A 339 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV53700(ALL)08/95] thirty-six pica chart:0095003-B 340 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV53800(ALL)08/95] 26 pica chart:0095025-A 341 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 [SV53850(ALL)08/95] eighteen pica chart:0095074-A % *[SV56000(ALL)01/95] *[SV56100(ALL)01/95] *[SV56150(ALL)01/95] *[SV56200(ALL)01/95] *[SV56300(ALL)01/95] *[SV56400(ALL)01/95] *[SV56500(ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage Maintenance Tips If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. General ❑ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. ❑ Protect from sunlight, if possible. ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. 342 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV56600(ALL)01/95] *[SV56700(ALL)01/95] Body *[SV56800(ALL)01/95] ❑ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed *[SV56900(ALL)01/95] ❑ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent *[SV57000(ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a *[SV57100(ALL)04/95] ❑ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges *[SV57200(ALL)01/95] *[SV57300(ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading. ❑ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and *[SV57350(ALL)01/95] *[SV57400(ALL)01/95] Engine *[SV57500(ALL)01/95] ❑ With your foot on the brake, shift through all *[SV57600(ALL)01/95] % [SV57700(ALL)07/94] * Fuel system *[SV57900(ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system and may also clog small orifices. % % ❑ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders. locations. rust. thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed. and latches with a light grade oil. solvents. ❑ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature. the gears while the engine is running. ❑ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. 343 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV58000(ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system. *[SV58100(ALL)01/95] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system will protect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructions packaged with the product. *[SV58200(ALL)01/95] *[SV58300(ALL)01/95] % [SV58400(ALL)01/95] * *[SV58500(ALL)01/95] *[SV58600(ALL)01/95] Cooling system *[SV58700(ALL)01/95] *[SV58800(ALL)01/95] Brakes *[SV58900(ALL)01/95] *[SV59000(ALL)05/95] *[SV59100(ALL)01/95] *[SV59200(ALL)01/95] Tires *[SV59300(ALL)03/95] ❑ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 % % % ❑ Protect against freezing temperatures. Battery ❑ Check and recharge as necessary. ❑ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat of grease. ❑ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released. ❑ Maintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous ❑ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. 344 File:15cpsva.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:51:51 1995 *[SV99900(ALL)07/95] thirty-six pica chart:FORDADPLN 345 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI02500(ALL)08/95] thirty-two pica chart:0095059-A 351 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI02600(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095082-A Front exterior view 352 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI03200(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095083-A Rear exterior view 353 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI03800(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095084-A Entrance view 354 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI04400(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095085-A Driver’s door 355 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI05000(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095086-A Instrument panel 356 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI05600(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095087-A Instrument cluster 357 File:16cpqia.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 16:32:22 1995 [QI06200(ALL)08/95] full page art:0095088-A Rear cargo area 358 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Index A Accessory position on the ignition . . Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . Air bag supplemental restraint system and child safety seats . . . . . . . description . . . . . . . . . . . . disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . indicator light . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . proper seating . . . . . . . . . . service and information labels . . . tone generator . . . . . . . . . . wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . Air cleaner filter location . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning auxiliary heater and air conditioner manual heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . Anti-lock brake system (ABS) description . . . . . . . . . . . . see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) Assistance (see Customer assistance) . Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 . 282 . . 26 . . 34 26, 28 . . 32 26, 28 . . 81 . . 28 . . 27 . . 28 . . 31 . . 27 . . . . . . . 269 337 98 . . . 92 . . 277 149, 182 . . 284 . . . . . . . . 193 193 248 245 . . 149 102, 104 Index 359 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive . fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . fluid, checking . . . . . . . . fluid, refill capacities . . . . . fluid, specification . . . . . . . Axle lubricant specifications. . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 308 307 335 338 . . . . 338 . . . . 335 . . 201, 297 B Backing up . . . . . . . . . . Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . acid, treating emergencies . . charging system warning light disconnecting . . . . . . . . how to service . . . . . . . jumping a disabled battery . . maintenance-free . . . . . . proper disposal, recycling . . replacement, specifications . . servicing . . . . . . . . . . voltage gauge. . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . brake warning light . . . . . checking and adding . . . . description . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . Brakelamp, high-mount . . . . Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . adjustment . . . . . . . . . anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . applying the brakes . . . . . brake warning light . . . . . 360 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 . . . 4 . . 304 225, 305 . . . 81 . . 228 . . 304 . . 225 . . 304 . . 305 . . 337 . . 304 . . . 82 . . 344 . . 309 . . . 75 . . 309 . . 309 310, 338 . . 106 . . 193 . . 193 . . 193 . . 196 . . . 75 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Brakes (continued) fluid, checking and adding fluid, refill capacities . . . fluid, specifications . . . . front disc . . . . . . . . if brakes do not grip well . master cylinder . . . . . . new brake linings. . . . . noise . . . . . . . . . . parking . . . . . . . . . power braking . . . . . . rear anti-lock . . . . . . . servicing . . . . . . . . . stopping distances . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . Brake-shift interlock . . . . . Break-in period . . . . . . . Brights (high beams) . . . . Built-in child seat cleaning . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . Bulbs, replacing . . . . . . . halogen . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, . . . . . . . . . 193, . . . . . . 195, 196, . . . . . 66, . . . . 84, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 309 338 193 195 309 7 195 197 193 194 309 198 219 344 187 7 110 . . 57 . . 48 . 322 . 323 . 323 C Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 163, 169, 175, Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . CD player (see Electronic sound system) . Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 4 253 335 71 34 177 331 156 302 Index 361 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . Charging system gauge . . . . . . Charging system warning light . . . Child safety restraints . . . . . . . built-in child seat . . . . . . . . child safety belts . . . . . . . . child safety seats . . . . . . . . Child safety seats . . . . . . . . . attaching with tether straps . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) built-in child seat . . . . . . . . in front seat . . . . . . . . . . in rear outboard seat . . . . . . in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . tether anchorage hardware . . . . Chime headlamps on. . . . . . . . . . key in ignition . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers checking and replacing . . . . . see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning your vehicle built-in child seat . . . . . . . . CD player and discs. . . . . . . chrome and aluminum parts . . . engine compartment. . . . . . . exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . instrument panel . . . . . . . . instrument panel lens . . . . . . interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . rear windows . . . . . . . . . . 362 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 . 82 . 81 . 32 . 48 . 58 . 34 . 34 . 46 15, 34 . . 48 . . 34 . . 34 . . 34 . . 46 . . . . 84 . . . . 62 . . . . 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 313 . 57 160 . 9 272 . 8 102 142 102 . 91 108 105 144 . 9 . 8 100 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Cleaning your vehicle (continued) rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . upholstery and interior trim . . . washing . . . . . . . . . . . . waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . windows . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate control system . . . . . . air conditioning . . . . . . . . heating only system. . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch, specifications . . . . . . . Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . Combination lap and shoulder belts Compact disc player (see Electronic sound system) . . Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound system) . . Console, description . . . . . . . . Controls instrument panel . . . . . . . . mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . steering column . . . . . . . . Coolant (see Engine coolant) . . . . checking and adding . . . . . . drain and flush . . . . . . . . . preparing for storage . . . . . . proper solution . . . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . temperature gauge . . . . . . . warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . 23 . 102 . 142 . . 8 . . 8 . 303 . 100 . . 91 . . 92 . . 95 155, 171 . . 338 . . . 65 . 11, 13 . . . 156 . . . . . . 150 145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 144 109 284 284 289 344 286 335 338 85 284 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, . . . . . Index 363 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada . . . . . . . . . . 247, 253 D Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . Daytime running light system . . Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . Defrost, rear window . . . . . . Dipstick automatic transmission fluid . . engine oil . . . . . . . . . . power steering fluid . . . . . . Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . Dispute Settlement Board . . . . Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . door ajar warning light . . . . lubricant specifications. . . . . Driving under special conditions . bad weather . . . . . . . . . heavy load . . . . . . . . . . high speed . . . . . . . . . . high water . . . . . . . . . . slippery roads . . . . . . . . tips for safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 . 104 . 252 . . 99 306, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 283 311 243 248 121 77 338 198 200 202 199 201 200 198 E Electrical system circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . operating when the engine is off . . . . . Electronic radio with cassette (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . Electronic sound system radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . tuning the radio . . . . . . . 151, 164, warranty and service information. . . . 364 Index 322 313 61 163 182 175 184 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronic sound system) . Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . Emergencies, roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . battery acid spills . . . . . . . fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . jump-starting . . . . . . . . . towing. . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency brake (parking brake) . Emission control system . . . . . catalytic converter . . . . . . emissions warranty . . . . . . Engine check engine warning light . . does not start . . . . . . . . fuel injected engine, starting . . fuel pump shut-off switch . . . preparing to start . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . service points . . . . . . . . starting . . . . . . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . storing your vehicle. . . . . . Engine block heater . . . . . . . Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . checking and adding . . . . . checking hoses . . . . . . . . disposal . . . . . . . . . . . drain and flush . . . . . . . . preparing for storage . . . . . proper solution . . . . . . . . recovery reservoir . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . refill procedure . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 175 . . . . 174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 245 306 278 225 243 197 331 331 331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 69 63 69 64 335 269 61, 64 . . 69 . 343 . . 68 . 284 . 284 . 288 . 288 . 289 . 344 . 286 269, 284 . 335 . 289 . 338 . . 85 Index 365 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Engine coolant temperature gauge Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . Engine idle speed control . . . . Engine knocking. . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . checking and adding . . . . . dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . disposal . . . . . . . . . . . engine oil pressure gauge . . . filter, specifications . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . “break-in” oils . . . . . . . . viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . Entry system, illuminated . . . . Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 266 67 276 282 283 283 266 83 337 335 338 282 7 282 107 71 4 . . . . . . 266 184 F Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury . . Federal Communications Commission Federal Highway Administration Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . Flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . Ford Customer Assistance Center . . Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . Ford Motor Company of Canada . . Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . 366 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . 113 . 110 . 229 . 335 . 247 . 248 . . 4 . 253 . . . 253 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . Four-Wheel Drive vehicles, special notice French owner guides, how to obtain . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . calculating fuel economy . . . . . . capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates . . . . . . . . filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . fuel filler door release lever . . . . . fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . treating emergencies . . . . . . . . Fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . override, manual . . . . . . . . . . remote release . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut-off switch engine does not start . . . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . . . . Fuse panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 . . 5 . . 3 . 273 . 280 . 335 . 276 . 281 . 273 . 337 . 273 . . 84 . 276 . 276 . 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 343 278 273 274 274 273 273 273 337 84 . . 69 . . 69 . 313 . . 313 322 Index 367 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . Gasohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . Gauges battery voltage gauge . . . . . . . charging system gauge . . . . . . engine coolant temperature gauge . engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . driving with a heavy load . . . . . Gearshift automatic operation . . . . . . . . gearshift override . . . . . . . . . locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) . calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . driving with a heavy load . . . . . 368 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 280 277 273 . . . . . . . . 82 82 85 83 84 88 87 88 . . . . . . 211 209 202 . . 66, . . . . . . . 66, . . . . . . . . 186 187 61 186 186 187 202 211 209 202 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 H Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . autolamp system . . . . . . . . . checking alignment . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . daytime running lights . . . . . . flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . turning on and off . . . . . . . . warning chime . . . . . . . . . . Heating heating and air conditioning system rear seat controls . . . . . . . . . standard heater system . . . . . . High beams . . . . . . . . . . . . indicator light . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . High-mount brakelamp, description . . Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . latch location . . . . . . . . . . . lubrication specifications. . . . . . release lever . . . . . . . . . . . working under the hood . . . . . Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 102 323 102 104 110 110 322 101 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, . . . . . . . . . 92 98 95 110 84 110 106 218 268 268 338 268 266 114 288 (VIN) . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . I Identification Number, Vehicle Idle relearning . . . . . . . . speed . . . . . . . . . . Ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . positions of the ignition . . removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . 305 . . . . . . . 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 61 62 Index 369 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . location of components . . . . . . registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated child seat (see Built-in child seat) . . . . . . Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 32, 34 . . 73 . . 89 . 108 . . 89 . . 91 . . . 48 . . 110 J Jack . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . positioning . . . . . . storage . . . . . . . . Jump-starting your vehicle attaching cables . . . . disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 . 237, 239 . . . 239 . . . 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 228 K Keys key in ignition chime . . . positions of the ignition . . removing from the ignition stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps autolamp delay system . . . checking . . . . . . . . . . daytime running light system flashing the lamps. . . . . . hazard flashers . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . high beams . . . . . . . . . high-mount brakelamp . . . illuminated entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 61 62 61 L 370 Index 102 322 104 110 113 101 110 106 107 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Lamps (continued) interior lamps . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . . Lane change indicator (see Turn Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . Lights, warning and indicator air bag. . . . . . . . . . . brake . . . . . . . . . . . charging system . . . . . . check engine . . . . . . . . door ajar. . . . . . . . . . engine oil pressure . . . . . hazard warning light . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . oil pressure . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . service engine soon . . . . . turn signal indicator . . . . Load limits . . . . . . . . . . GAWR. . . . . . . . . . . GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . trailer towing. . . . . . . . Lubricant specifications . . . . Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . Lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . standard . . . . . . . . . . tightening sequence . . . . . Lumbar support, seats . . . . . Lumbar support pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . signal) . . . . . . . . . . . 101 322 219 109 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 75 81 78 77 83 113 84 83 77 78 109 202 202 202 205 338 223 237 239 241 142 142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance schedule and record (see separate Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet) . . . . . . . Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . Methanol in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . 265 . 309 . 277 . . . . M Index 371 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Mileage, calculating fuel economy. Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . dual electric remote control . . Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 144 144 337 N National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 252 New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 7 O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer description . . . . . . . . . . . trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system Order forms, service information . . Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 . . 88 . 337 . 282 . 282 . 332 . 261 . 188 . 254 P Parking brake . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . warning light . . . . . . Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . PCV valve, specifications . . Power door locks . . . . . Power features door locks . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . mirrors. . . . . . . . . windows . . . . . . . . 372 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 . 197 . . 75 . 337 . 337 . 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 142 144 127 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Power steering dipstick . . . . . . . . . driving with power steering fluid, checking and adding fluid, specifications . . . . servicing . . . . . . . . . Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 191 311 338 191 268 . . . . 149 194 . . . . 201, . . . 338 335 297 98 R Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . Rear anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . Rear axle lubricant specification . . . . . . . refill capacity. . . . . . . . . . . traction lok. . . . . . . . . . . . Rear climate control system . . . . . Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . Regulations, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints) adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 . . 291 . . 335 . . . . 252 252 . . . . . . . . 11 . . 32 32, 34 . 245 . 225 . 297 . . . . . 198 . . 11 . 219 . . 5 S Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . Safety chains, when towing a trailer . Safety Compliance Certification Label . Index 373 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . Safety restraints adjusting the safety belts. . . . . automatic locking mode . . . . . center front lap belt . . . . . . . center rear lap belt . . . . . . . cleaning the safety belts . . . . . extension assembly . . . . . . . for adults . . . . . . . . . . . for children. . . . . . . . . . . for infants . . . . . . . . . . . for pregnant women. . . . . . . lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . maintenance . . . . . . . . . . proper use . . . . . . . . . . . replacement . . . . . . . . . . untwisting or unjamming the safety belt . . . . . . . . warning light and chime. . . . . Safety seats for children . . . . . . attaching with tether straps . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) built-in child seat . . . . . . . . in front seat . . . . . . . . . . in rear outboard . . . . . . . . in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . tether anchorage hardware . . . . Seat belts (see Safety restraints) . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjusting the seat, manual . . . . child safety seats . . . . . . . . cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . . . . . quick release rear captain’s chair . reclining the seat . . . . . . . . seat/bed conversion . . . . . . . 374 Index . . . 252 . . . 278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, . . . . . . . 32, . . 11, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 15 20 20 23 22 11 32 34 11 13 22 11 22 . 23 . 77 . 34 . 46 15, 34 . . 48 . . 34 . . 34 . . 34 . . 46 . . 11 . 128 . 128 . . 34 . 142 . 142 . 131 . 128 . 141 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . Service concerns . . . . . . . . . Servicing your vehicle . . . . . . . precautions when servicing . . . servicing when you tow . . . . . Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . Shift positions (see Gearshift). . . . Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) Side mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . changing the tire . . . . . . . . conventional spare . . . . . . . finding the spare . . . . . . . . removing the spare tire . . . . . storing the flat tire . . . . . . . temporary spare . . . . . . . . Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . Special driving conditions . . . . . Special notice E-4WD vehicles. . . . . . . . . Specification chart, lubricants. . . . Speed control, when towing a trailer Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your vehicle preparing to start your vehicle . . starting a cold engine . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . . starting a warm engine . . . . . starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . . . . . . . . . Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, . 5 246 265 266 202 187 186 . . . 11, 13 . . 13 . 144 . 302 . 229 229, 237 . 229 . 231 . 231 231, 239 . 229 . 337 . 198 . . . . . . . . . . 5 . 338 . 220 . . 87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 65 69 65 225 191 Index 375 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Steering wheel horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . speed controls . . . . . . . . . tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage compartments center console. . . . . . . . . . underseat storage drawer . . . . Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . Supplemental air bag readiness light Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . 114 . . 61 . 115 . 114 . . . . . . . . . . . 145 . 143 . 342 . . 81 . . 26 T Tail lamps bulb replacement . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . Temperature control (see Climate Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints) . . . . Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . changing . . . . . . . . . . checking the pressure . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . inspection and maintenance . replacing . . . . . . . . . . rotating . . . . . . . . . . snow tires and chains . . . . spare tire . . . . . . . . . . storing your vehicle . . . . . tire grades . . . . . . . . . treadwear . . . . . . . . . wear bands . . . . . . . . . wheel and tire matching . . . Towing your vehicle . . . . . . using wheel dollies . . . . . with a tow truck . . . . . . Traction control . . . . . . . . Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . 376 Index . . . . . 322 . . . . . 102 control) . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 201, 46 114 294 229 294 303 295 299 297 302 231 344 299 299 299 302 243 243 243 297 297 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Trailer towing calculating maximum trailer safety chains . . . . . . . trailer brakes . . . . . . . trailer lamps . . . . . . . Transmission automatic operation . . . . fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . . . . . . fluid, refill capacities . . . lubricant specifications . . Transmission control switch . Trip odometer . . . . . . . Tune-up specifications (VECI) Turn signal . . . . . . . . . indicator lights . . . . . . lever . . . . . . . . . . weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 219 219 219 . . . . . . 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 335 . 338 . 188 . . 88 . 332 . 109 . 109 . 109 U Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . 266 V Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . understanding loading information . . . Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . 110 332 5 205 211 207 342 91 282 82 Index 377 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 W Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . . Warning chimes headlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty Information Booklet . . . . Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . rear window reservoir . . . . . . . reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . Wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inspection and maintenance . . . . lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacement . . . . . . . . . . . Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power windows, operating . . . . . rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . 378 Index . . . 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 62 77 73 4 4 4 184 . 4 110 291 291 202 302 338 243 294 303 239 294 237 299 127 127 . 99 File:cpixa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:05 1995 Windshield, washing . . . . . . . . Windshield washer fluid and wipers . checking and adding fluid . . . . . checking and replacing wiper blades liftgate reservoir . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . variable interval wipers . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer . . . . Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, . . . . . . 110 110 291 293 291 110 291 338 110 110 243 Index 379 File:17cpgsa.ex Update:Tue Aug 29 17:47:17 1995 Service Station Information [GS00200(ALL)08/95] twenty-six pica chart:0095019-B 380